A technical manual from the experts
in Business-Critical Continuity™
NetSure ™ -48V DC Power System
Installation Instructions
Section 5974 (Issue AP, March 5, 2012)
SPEC. NO.: 582126000
MODEL: 701NVBB
Business-Critical Continuity™, Emerson Network Power, and the Emerson Network
Power logo are trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric Co.
Lorain® and Vortex® are registered trademarks of Emerson
Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.
NetSure™, NetSpan™, NetReach™, NetXtend™, and NetPerform™
are trademarks of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The products covered by this instruction manual are manufactured and/or
sold by Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and may not be
suitable for all applications. While every precaution has been taken to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this document, Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.
assumes no responsibility and disclaims all liability for damages resulting from use of this information
or for any errors or omissions. Refer to other local practices or building codes as applicable for the correct
methods, tools, and materials to be used in performing procedures not specifically described in this document.
This document is the property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.
and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use or disclosure of it without the written permission
of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Copyright
©
2012, Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.
All rights reserved throughout the world.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
STATIC WARNING
The printed circuit cards used in this equipment contain static sensitive components. The warnings listed below
must be observed to prevent damage to these components. Disregarding any of these warnings may result in
personal injury or damage to the equipment.
1. Strictly adhere to the procedures provided in this document.
2. Before touching any static sensitive component or printed circuit card containing such a component,
discharge all static electricity from yourself by wearing a wrist strap grounded through a one megohm
resistor. Some wrist straps, such as Emerson Network Power Part Number 631810600, have a built-in
one megohm resistor; no external resistor is necessary. Read and follow wrist strap manufacturer’s
instructions outlining use of a specific wrist strap.
3. Do not touch the traces or components on a printed circuit card containing static sensitive components.
Handle the printed circuit card only by the edges that do not have connector pads.
4. After removing a printed circuit card containing a static sensitive component, place the printed circuit card
only on conductive or anti-static material such as conductive foam, conductive plastic, or aluminum foil.
Do not use ordinary Styrofoam or ordinary plastic.
5. Store and ship static sensitive devices or printed circuit cards containing such components only in static
shielding containers.
6. If necessary to repair a printed circuit card containing a static sensitive component, wear an appropriately
grounded wrist strap, work on a conductive surface, use a grounded soldering iron, and use grounded
test equipment.
Static Warning
Page 1 of 2
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
Page 2 of 2
Static Warning
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
FCC INFORMATION
The MCA Interface Modem Option (if installed) has been granted a registration number by the Federal
Communications Commission, under Part 68 rules and regulations for direct connection to the telephone lines. In
order to comply with these FCC rules, the following instructions must be carefully read and applicable portions
followed completely:
a) Direct connection to the telephone lines may be made only through the standard plug- ended cord
furnished to the utility-installed jack. No connection may be made to party or coin phone lines. Prior to
connecting the device to the telephone lines, you must:
b) Call your telephone company and inform them you have an FCC registered device you desire to connect
to their telephone lines. Give them the number(s) of the line(s) to be used, the make and model of the
device, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence. This information will be found on the device
or enclosed with instructions as well as the jack suitable for your device.
c) After the telephone company has been advised of the above you may connect your device if the jack is
available, or after the telephone company has made the installation.
d) Repairs may be made only by the manufacturer or his authorized service agency. Unauthorized repairs
void registration and warranty. Contact seller or manufacturer for details of permissible user performed
routine repairs, and where and how to have other than routine repairs.
e) If, through abnormal circumstances, harm to the telephone lines is caused, it should be unplugged until it
can be determined if your device or the telephone line is the source. If your device is the source, it should
not be reconnected until necessary repairs are effected.
f)
Should the telephone company notify you that your device is causing harm, the device should be
unplugged. The telephone company will, where practicable, notify you, that temporary discontinuance of
service may be required. However, where prior notice is not practicable, the telephone company may
temporarily discontinue service, if such action is reasonably necessary, in such cases the telephone
company must (A) Promptly notify you of such temporary discontinuance, (B) Afford you the opportunity
to correct the condition and (C) Inform you of your rights to bring a complaint to the FCC under their rules.
g) The telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment, operations or
procedures, where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not
inconsistent with FCC rules. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer’s
devices incompatible with telephone company facilities, or require modification or alteration, or otherwise
materially affect its performance, written notification must be given to the user, to allow uninterrupted
service.
The following information is provided here and on a label attached to the outside of the MCA Interface Modem
Option (if installed).
JACK
RINGER EQUIVALENCE
FCC REGISTRATION NUMBER
RJ-11
0.2A
B46USA-22429-MM-E
FCC Information
Page 1 of 2
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
Page 2 of 2
FCC Information
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PAGE
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
AND INSTALLATION CHECKLIST ....................................................................................... 1-1
Table of Contents............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Preface ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Installation Acceptance Checklist .................................................................................................................... 1-1
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS........................................................... 2-1
Table of Contents............................................................................................................................................. 2-1
General Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Mounting the Relay Racks ............................................................................................................................... 2-2
Mounting .................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Ventilation Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 2-3
Mounting System Components in an Equipment Rack ................................................................................... 2-4
Mounting the Distribution Cabinet ............................................................................................................. 2-4
Mounting the LMS1000 (List 80) ............................................................................................................... 2-7
Mounting the Rectifier Module Shelves..................................................................................................... 2-9
Mounting List 63 and 64 DC-DC Converter Shelves............................................................................... 2-15
Installing Optional Battery Busbar Extension Kits, Part Nos. 514713 and 529143 ....................................... 2-18
Installing Part No. 514713 Busbar Kit ..................................................................................................... 2-18
Installing Part No. 529143 Busbar Kit ..................................................................................................... 2-20
Installing Optional Lug Adapter Busbar Kits, Part Nos. 514714 and 534449 ................................................ 2-22
Installing the Lug Adapter Busbars.......................................................................................................... 2-22
Installing the Optional System Load Shunt Test point Kit, P/N 545569 (if furnished).................................... 2-24
Admonishments ....................................................................................................................................... 2-24
Installing Kit ............................................................................................................................................. 2-24
Installing the List 72, List 74, List 75, List 76, List 77, List 78, or RS-485 (P/O List 80) MCA Interface
Option (if furnished)........................................................................................................................................ 2-28
Mounting a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe (if furnished) ................................... 2-28
Mounting a TXM (Multiple Probe Concentrator Module) and Probes (if furnished)....................................... 2-28
Installing Bullet Nose Type Fuseholders and TPS/TLS Fuses (if furnished)................................................. 2-29
Installing Bullet Nose Type Circuit Breakers (if furnished)............................................................................. 2-31
Installing GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly (P/N 509128) On A Bullet Nose Type Distribution
Assembly (if furnished)................................................................................................................................... 2-33
Installing TPH Fuses (if furnished)................................................................................................................. 2-36
CHAPTER 3 SETTING WIRING OPTIONS ........................................................................... 3-1
Table of Contents............................................................................................................................................. 3-1
Admonishments ............................................................................................................................................... 3-2
General Safety........................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Voltages..................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Circuit Card Handling ................................................................................................................................ 3-3
Table of Contents
Page i
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Wiring Options on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532 Located in Distribution
Cabinet(s)......................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532 .................................................................. 3-3
Internal/External Voltage Sensing and Internal/External System Voltage Meter Reading Circuit
Card P/N 500476 Orientation .................................................................................................................... 3-3
Fuses and Fuse Alarm Polarity Circuit Card P/N 500477 Orientation ...................................................... 3-4
LVD (J5) Jumper........................................................................................................................................ 3-5
Shunt POD (J6) Jumper ............................................................................................................................ 3-6
Final Procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card P/N 509477 Switches S1 though S4 Settings............................ 3-8
Alarm Termination / Audible Alarm Circuit Card P/N 524734 Jumpers J10 and J11 Settings (List 71
Only)............................................................................................................................................................... 3-11
MCA Local and Remote Access Lockout Switch S1 Settings on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card
(Main Bay Only) ............................................................................................................................................. 3-14
MCA Modem Interface Option "Number of Rings Before Answer" Jumper (Main Bay Only) ........................ 3-17
MCA RS-232/Modem Interface Option "Number of Rings Before Answer" Jumper (Main Bay Only)........... 3-19
MCA RS-232/Modem Interface Option "RS-232 Port Hardware Handshake" Jumper (Main Bay Only)....... 3-20
List RD and RE Shunt Monitoring (Shunt POD) Circuit Card Switch Settings .............................................. 3-22
Shunt Capacity Selection Switches ......................................................................................................... 3-22
Shunt POD Identification Switch.............................................................................................................. 3-22
Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card P/N 535250 Switches S1 and S2 Settings .......................................... 3-25
CHAPTER 4 MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS......................................................... 4-1
Table of Contents............................................................................................................................................. 4-1
Admonishments ............................................................................................................................................... 4-3 Wiring Considerations ...................................................................................................................................... 4-4 Relay Rack Grounding Connection (Frame Ground)....................................................................................... 4-4 External Connections to List 80 LMS1000 Monitoring System (If Furnished) ................................................. 4-4 AC Input and AC Input Equipment Grounding Connections............................................................................ 4-5 Connections to 588705000 List 11 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves .......................... 4-5 Connections to 588705000 List 1 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves (when
582126000 List 45 AC Input Termination Panel is NOT provided) ........................................................... 4-6 Connections to 582126000 List 45 (Single-Phase) Top Mount AC Input Termination Panel ................... 4-9 Connections to 588705000 List 3 (Three-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves (when
582126000 List 46 AC Input Termination Panel is NOT provided) ......................................................... 4-12 Connections to 582126000 List 46 (Three-Phase) Top Mount AC Input Termination Panel.................. 4-15 External Alarm, Reference, and Control Connections ................................................................................... 4-18 Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe or TXM (Multiple Probe Concentrator
Module) Connection (if required) ............................................................................................................. 4-20 Connections to Terminal Block TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532 ................... 4-20 Connections to J8 on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 (if List 71 Audible
Alarm/Alarm Termination Circuit Card is NOT Provided) ........................................................................ 4-24 Connections to Terminal Blocks J1-J4 on Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card P/N
524734 (List 71 only) ............................................................................................................................... 4-36 Battery Disconnect External Alarm Connections to List RB, RC, RD, or RE (if furnished) ..................... 4-45 Load Shunt Connections (Shunted GJ/218 Circuit Breakers and/or List AJ and CJ Distribution
Bus Panels) (if furnished) ........................................................................................................................ 4-46 Page ii
Table of Contents
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Interbay and Bay-to-Bay Cable Connections................................................................................................. 4-51 Factory Connected Interbay Cables ........................................................................................................ 4-52 Customer Connected Bay-to-Bay Cables ............................................................................................... 4-56 Connections to List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves......................................................................................... 4-60 Connecting List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves Alarm Cable Harness..................................................... 4-60 Connecting List 63 and 64 Converter Shelf Output Cables .................................................................... 4-60 Installing Bay-to-Bay Busbars (List 2 Only) ................................................................................................... 4-64 Cable Connection(s) to the MCA Interface Option ........................................................................................ 4-66 RS-485 MCA Interface Option Connection (List 80 Only) ....................................................................... 4-66 Modem MCA Interface Option Connection (Lists 72 and 74 Only) ......................................................... 4-66 RS-232 MCA Interface Option Connection (List 74 Only) ....................................................................... 4-68 Ethernet MCA Interface Option Connection (Lists 75-78 Only) .............................................................. 4-69 Load Connections to Distribution Cabinet(s) ................................................................................................. 4-70 Distribution Assemblies Wiring Illustrations............................................................................................. 4-71 Connecting Loads to Distribution Assemblies Equipped with Bullet Nose Type Distribution
Devices (TPS/TLS Fuses and/or Bullet Nose-Type Circuit Breakers) .................................................... 4-71 Connecting Loads to Distribution Assemblies Equipped with TPH-Type Distribution Fuse
Mounting Blocks and/or GJ/218-Type Distribution Circuit Breaker Mounting Blocks ............................. 4-72 Connecting Loads to a P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly .............................. 4-72 Connecting Loads to Bulk Feed Distribution Assemblies........................................................................ 4-72 Battery Connections to Power System .......................................................................................................... 4-88 If NO Internal Battery Disconnect Device is Provided ............................................................................. 4-88 If Internal Battery Disconnect Fuses or Circuit Breakers are Provided ................................................... 4-89 If an Internal Battery Disconnect Contactor is Provided (List RA, RB, RC, RD, RE) .............................. 4-90 If a Lorain Battery Stand Under Power System is Provided (List 92)...................................................... 4-90 Installing Rear Busbar Shield onto the LMS1000 (List 80) ............................................................................ 4-96 Installing Bay-to-Bay Busbar Covers (List 2 Only)......................................................................................... 4-97 Installing and Connecting Batteries in List 93 (If Provided) ........................................................................... 4-98 Admonishments ....................................................................................................................................... 4-98 Battery Manufacturer Information ............................................................................................................ 4-98 Installing and Connecting Batteries ......................................................................................................... 4-99 Installing Optional Front Battery Cover (23” Trays Only) ...................................................................... 4-101 Installing Optional Circuit Breaker Guard .............................................................................................. 4-102 Installing External Shunt Monitoring Kit P/N 541134 ................................................................................... 4-103 Kit Contents ........................................................................................................................................... 4-103 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................................ 4-103 CHAPTER 5 INSTALLING RECTIFIER MODULES
AND INITIALLY STARTING THE SYSTEM........................................................................... 5-1
Table of Contents............................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Installing the Rectifier Modules ........................................................................................................................ 5-2
Installing the Converter Modules in List 63 and 64 (if furnished).................................................................... 5-4
Initially Starting, Configuring, and Checking System Operation ...................................................................... 5-5
Admonishment........................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Controls and Indicators.............................................................................................................................. 5-5
Table of Contents
Page iii
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Pre-Charging Load Capacitors .................................................................................................................. 5-7
Initial Startup Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 5-7
Initially Starting the System ....................................................................................................................... 5-7
MCA Initialization ....................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Initially Connecting Low Voltage Disconnect Circuits (if furnished) ........................................................ 5-16
Configuring the System ........................................................................................................................... 5-16
Setting Up the MCA Ethernet Option TCP/IP (and SNMP if required) Parameters (Lists 75, 76,
77, and 78 Only) ...................................................................................................................................... 5-20
Checking Meter Operation....................................................................................................................... 5-28
Checking Adjustment and Calibration Values ......................................................................................... 5-30
Checking MCA Audible Alarm and Audible Alarm Cutoff (if available) ................................................... 5-30
Checking Manual Test/Equalize and Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize........................................ 5-31
Checking Remote Test/Equalize ............................................................................................................. 5-34
Checking Remote High Voltage Shutdown ............................................................................................. 5-34
Checking Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect.................................................................. 5-34
Checking Remote On/Off (TR) (if RS-485 Interface is installed)............................................................. 5-35
Checking AC Fail Alarm and Rectifier Module Fail Alarm ....................................................................... 5-35
Checking Fuse Alarm/Circuit Breaker Alarm........................................................................................... 5-36
Checking System High Voltage Alarm 1 ................................................................................................. 5-39
Checking System High Voltage Alarm 2 ................................................................................................. 5-40
Checking System Battery On Discharge Alarm....................................................................................... 5-42
Checking System 50% Battery On Discharge (Very Low Voltage) Alarm............................................... 5-43
Checking System Current Alarm ............................................................................................................. 5-44
Checking Subsystem (if connected) High Voltage Alarm........................................................................ 5-46
Checking Subsystem (if connected) Low Voltage Alarm......................................................................... 5-47
Checking Subsystem (if connected) Current Alarm ................................................................................ 5-49
Checking Low Voltage Disconnect (if furnished)..................................................................................... 5-50
Checking System Status ......................................................................................................................... 5-57
Final Step................................................................................................................................................. 5-57
REVISION RECORD
Page iv
Table of Contents
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Preface ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
Installation Acceptance Checklist.................................................................................... 1-2
PREFACE
This document (Section 5974) provides Installation Instructions for NetSure™ Power
System Model 701NVBB, Spec. No. 582126000.
For User Instructions, refer to Section 5975 provided on the CD (Electronic
Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Refer to SAG582126000 (System Application Guide) for additional information. This
document, along with the complete document set, can be accessed from the CD
(Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Refer to PD588705000 (Power Data Sheet) for Rectifier Module (PCU) Mounting Shelf
information. This document can be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation
Package) furnished with your system.
Refer to UM1R483500e (Rectifier Module User Instructions) for Rectifier Module (PCU)
information. This document can be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation
Package) furnished with your system.
For a color MCA Menu Tree, refer to Section 6022. Section 6022 is provided in the
separate INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER MANUAL (it is also provided
on the CD).
Your power system may contain an optional LMS1000 Monitoring System, refer to
Section 5879 (LMS1000 Installation Instructions) and Section 5847 (LMS1000 User
Instructions) provided on the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with the
LMS1000.
Chapter 1. General Information and Installation Checklist
Page 1-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
INSTALLATION ACCEPTANCE CHECKLIST
Provided below is an Installation Acceptance Checklist. This checklist helps ensure
proper installation and initial operation of the system. As the procedures presented in
Chapters 2 through 5 of this document are completed, check the appropriate box on this
list. If the procedure is not required to be performed for your installation site, also check
the box in this list to indicate that the procedure was read. When installation is done,
ensure that each block in this list has been checked. Some of these procedures may
have been factory performed for you.
Note: The system is not powered up until the end of this checklist.
Note: Some of these procedures may have been performed at the factory for you.
Chapter 2
 Relay Racks Mounted to the Floor
 All Equipment Mounted in Relay Rack(s)
 Optional Battery Busbar Extension Kits Installed
 Optional Lug Adapter Busbar Kits Installed
 MCA Interface Option Installed (if required)
 Optional System Load Shunt Test Point Kit Installed (if required)
 Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe Mounted (if required)
 TXM (Multiple Probe Concentrator Module) and Probes Mounted (if required)
 Bullet Nose Type Fuseholders and TPS/TLS Fuses Installed (if required)
 Bullet Nose Type Circuit Breakers Installed (if required)
 GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly Installed (if required)
 TPH Fuses Installed (if required)
Chapter 3
 Internal/External Voltage Sensing and Internal/External System Voltage Meter
Reading Circuit Card Oriented to Proper Position
 Fuses and Fuse Alarm Polarity Circuit Card Oriented to Proper Position
 LVD and Shunt POD Jumpers Set
 Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card Identification Switches Set
Page 1-2
Chapter 1. General Information and Installation Checklist
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
 Audible Alarm Local/Remote Jumpers Set (List 71 only)
 MCA Local and Remote Access Lockout Switches Set
 Modem or RS-232/Modem Option (if furnished) "Number of Rings before Answer"
Jumper Set
 RS-232/Modem Option (if furnished) "RS-232 Hardware Handshake" Jumper Set
 List RD and RE Shunt POD Switches Set
 Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card Switches Set
Chapter 4
 Relay Rack Grounding Connection (Frame Ground) Made
 External Connections to LMS1000 (List 80) Made (as required)
 AC Input and AC Input Equipment Grounding Connections Made
 External Alarm, Reference, and Control Connections Made
 Interbay and Bay-to-Bay Cable Connections Made (as required)
 List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves (if furnished) Connections Made
 Bay-to-Bay Busbars Installed (List 2 only)
 MCA Interface Option Cable Connection(s) Made (as required)
 Load Connections Made
 Battery Connections Made
 Rear Cover Installed on LMS1000 (List 80) (if required)
 Bay-to-Bay Busbar Covers Installed (List 2 only)
 Batteries Installed and Connected in a List 93 Battery Shelf (if furnished)
 External Shunt Monitoring Kit Installed (if furnished)
Chapter 5
 Rectifier Modules (PCUs) Installed
 Converter Modules (if furnished) Installed
 System Started, Configured, and Checked
Chapter 1. General Information and Installation Checklist
Page 1-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
Page 1-4
Chapter 1. General Information and Installation Checklist
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General Requirements .................................................................................................... 2-2
Mounting the Relay Racks............................................................................................... 2-2
Mounting ................................................................................................................... 2-2
Ventilation Requirements.......................................................................................... 2-3
Mounting System Components in an Equipment Rack................................................... 2-4
Mounting the Distribution Cabinet............................................................................. 2-4
Mounting the LMS1000 (List 80)............................................................................... 2-7
Mounting the Rectifier Module Shelves .................................................................... 2-9
Mounting List 63 and 64 DC-DC Converter Shelves .............................................. 2-15
Installing Optional Battery Busbar Extension Kits, Part Nos. 514713 and 529143....... 2-18
Installing Part No. 514713 Busbar Kit..................................................................... 2-18
Installing Part No. 529143 Busbar Kit..................................................................... 2-20
Installing Optional Lug Adapter Busbar Kits, Part Nos. 514714 and 534449 ............... 2-22
Installing the Lug Adapter Busbars ......................................................................... 2-22
Installing the Optional System Load Shunt Test point Kit, P/N 545569 (if
furnished)....................................................................................................................... 2-24
Admonishments ...................................................................................................... 2-24
Installing Kit............................................................................................................. 2-24
Installing the List 72, List 74, List 75, List 76, List 77, List 78, or RS-485 (P/O List
80) MCA Interface Option (if furnished)......................................................................... 2-28
Mounting a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe (if
furnished)....................................................................................................................... 2-28
Mounting a TXM (Multiple Probe Concentrator Module) and Probes (if furnished) ...... 2-28
Installing Bullet Nose Type Fuseholders and TPS/TLS Fuses (if furnished) ................ 2-29
Installing Bullet Nose Type Circuit Breakers (if furnished) ............................................ 2-31
Installing GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly (P/N 509128) On A Bullet Nose Type
Distribution Assembly (if furnished)............................................................................... 2-33
Installing TPH Fuses (if furnished) ................................................................................ 2-36
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

This product is intended only for installation in a Restricted Access Location on or
above a non-combustible surface.

This product is intended for installation in Network Telecommunication Facilities (CO,
vault, hut, or other environmentally controlled electronic equipment enclosure).

This product is intended for connection to the common bonding network in a Network
Telecommunication Facility (CO, vault, hut, or other environmentally controlled
electronic equipment enclosure).

The installer should be familiar with the installation requirements and techniques to
be used in mounting the relay racks to the floor.

Clearance requirements are:
a) Recommended minimum aisle space clearance for the front of the relay rack is
2' 6".
b) Recommended minimum aisle space clearance for the rear of the relay rack is
2’ 0” for any of the following conditions:
1) Multiple bay arrangements that incorporate rear inter-bay busbars (List 2
bays).
2) Making AC input connections to Rectifier Mounting Shelves when a Top
Mount AC Input Termination Panel is not ordered.
3) Addition of a Rectifier Mounting Shelf in the field.
4) Addition of any DC-DC Converter Mounting Shelf (List 63 or 64) in the field.
For all other conditions, recommended minimum aisle space clearance for the rear of
the relay rack is that which is specified for proper Rectifier Mounting Shelf ventilation.
Refer to the specific Rectifier Mounting Shelf Power Data Sheet for ventilation
spacing requirements.
Note: Minimum spacing specified for ventilation may not permit replacement of
certain components such as busbars or Rectifier Mounting Shelves.
MOUNTING THE RELAY RACKS
Note: Refer to the General Requirements section at the beginning of this chapter.
Mounting
All equipment cabinets are factory mounted to the relay rack(s) specified when ordered.
The system consists of one or two relay racks. For busbar-connected systems (List 1
with List 2), locate relay racks in a line adjacent to each other, with no space between
them.
Refer to Figure 2-1 for relay rack floor mounting dimensions.
Page 2-2
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Ventilation Requirements
Follow the requirements stated in the “Ventilation Requirements” section of
PD588705000 (Power Data Sheet). The Power Data Sheet can be accessed from the
CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
1.000
2.000
0.437
12 Places
2.000
Part Nos.
543151, 543152, 543153, 543154, 543155, 543156, 543157
5.000
15.000
2.000
2.000
22.500
24.750
24.75
1.000
1.24
0.812
8 Places
Part Nos.
543160, 543161, 543162, 543163, 543164
12.53
9.88
15.00
3.44
17.50
2.13
20.13
1.24
Figure 2-1
Relay Rack Floor Mounting Dimensions
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
MOUNTING SYSTEM COMPONENTS IN AN EQUIPMENT RACK
Note: If the power system was ordered in a relay rack, all procedures in this section
have been performed at the factory.
This power system is designed to mount in a standard 23” relay rack having 1-3/4”
multiple drillings. Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 for overall
dimensions and a list of available relay racks. The SAG can be accessed from the CD
(Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Mounting the Distribution Cabinet
The Distribution Cabinet must be the top-most component in the rack. Perform the
following steps to mount the Distribution Cabinet.
Danger: The relay rack must be securely anchored to the floor before the
Distribution Cabinet is installed.
The Distribution Cabinet is heavy. Use a hoist, battery lift, or other
appropriate lifting device to raise and support the cabinet during the
installation. Take appropriate precautions to avoid injury. Use caution
not to damage busbars that extend from the bottom of the cabinet. Do
not attempt to support the cabinet on these busbars.
Procedure
1) Remove the Distribution Cabinet from its shipping brackets. Position the cabinet
in the equipment rack.
Note: Install the ground washers so the teeth dig into the paint on the mounting
angles. Torque all screws to 65 in-lbs.
2) 1-Row Cabinet: Install (8) 12-24 x 1/2" hex head thread-forming screws (P/N
218710500) and (8) No. 12 ground washers (P/N 215640600). Refer to Figure
2-2A.
3) 2-Row Cabinet: Install (8) 12-24 x 1/2" hex head thread-forming screws (P/N
218710500) and (8) No. 12 ground washers (P/N 215640600). Refer to Figure
2-2A.
4) 3-Row Cabinet: Install (14) 12-24 x 1/2" hex head thread-forming screws (P/N
218710500) and (14) No. 12 ground washers (P/N 215640600). Refer to Figure
2-2B.
5) 4-Row Cabinet: Install (16) 12-24 x 1/2" hex head thread-forming screws (P/N
218710500) and (16) No. 12 ground washers (P/N 215640600). Refer to Figure
2-2B.
Page 2-4
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
NO. 12 GROUND WASHER
(4 PLACES PER SIDE)
12-24 X 1/2"
THREAD FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(4 PLACES PER SIDE)
1-ROW CABINET
NO. 12 GROUND WASHER
(4 PLACES PER SIDE)
12-24 X 1/2"
THREAD FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(4 PLACES PER SIDE)
2-ROW CABINET
Figure 2-2A
Mounting the 1- and 2-Row Distribution Cabinets
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-5
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
NO. 12 GROUND WASHER
(7 PLACES PER SIDE)
12-24 X 1/2"
THREAD FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(7 PLACES PER SIDE)
3-ROW CABINET
NO. 12 GROUND WASHER
(8 PLACES PER SIDE)
12-24 X 1/2"
THREAD FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(8 PLACES PER SIDE)
4-ROW CABINET
Figure 2-2B
Mounting the 3- and 4-Row Distribution Cabinets
Page 2-6
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Mounting the LMS1000 (List 80)
If provided, mount the LMS1000 directly beneath the Distribution Cabinet, as follows.
Procedure
1) Mount the LMS1000 to the relay rack directly beneath the Distribution Cabinet.
See Figure 2-3A.
Note: Install the ground washers so the teeth dig into the paint on the mounting
angles. Torque all relay rack mounting screws to 65 in-lbs.
2) Mount two (2) rear cover support brackets to the rear of the LMS1000. See
Figure 2-3B.
FRONT VIEW
12-24 X 1/2"
THREAD FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(2 PLACES PER SIDE)
NO. 12 GROUND WASHER
(1 PLACE PER SIDE SEE DETAIL A FOR LOCATIONS)
DETAIL A
GROUND
WASHER
GROUND
WASHER
Figure 2-3A
Mounting the LMS1000 (List 80)
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-7
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
REAR VIEW
BRACKET
P/N 528514
(2 PLACES)
6-32 X 1/2" THREAD
FORMING HEX HEAD SCREW
(2 PLACES PER BRACKET)
Figure 2-3B
Installing LMS1000 (List 80) Rear Cover Brackets
Page 2-8
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Mounting the Rectifier Module Shelves
Procedure
1) If the Distribution Cabinet-to-Rectifier Module Shelf busbars were not installed at
the factory, install them now. See Figure 2-4A for details. Hand-tighten busbar
hardware at this time. Hardware will be torqued to specification after busbars
are connected to the Rectifier Module Shelves in a later step.
Install the Belleville lock washers so the concave side is towards the busbar.
Note: -48V SUPPLY and RETURN busbars are identical.
2) Remove the shield that covers the output busbars from the rear of the Rectifier
Module Shelf. See Figure 2-4B.
3) Apply electrical anti-oxidizing compound to the output busbars on the rear of the
Rectifier Module Shelf and also to the Distribution Cabinet busbars (where they
will contact each other). See Figures 2-4A and 2-4B.
4) Install the Rectifier Module Shelf into the rack directly below the Distribution
Cabinet or LMS1000 (if installed). See Figure 2-4C.
Hardware build-up is:
12-24 x 3/4" screw and flat washer, (1) set per side.
12-24 x 3/4" screw and ground washer, (1) set per side
Install the ground washers so the teeth dig into the paint on the mounting angles.
Torque all screws to 65 in-lbs.
5) Plug the connector on the cable exiting the top of the Rectifier Module Shelf with
the mating connector exiting the bottom of the Distribution Cabinet or the
Rectifier Module Shelf mounted above it. See Figure 2-4D.
6) Connect the system busbars that extend from the bottom of the Distribution
Cabinet to the output busbars of the Rectifier Module Shelf. See Figure 2-4E.
Hardware build-up is:
1/4-20 x 1" bolt
1/4" Belleville lock washer
1/4" flat washer
Install the Belleville lock washers so the concave side is towards the busbar.
When all Rectifier Module Shelves are installed, torque all bolts to 60 in-lbs.
Note: If the holes in the busbar don’t line up with holes in the Rectifier Module
Shelf output busbars, loosen the busbar connections in the Distribution
Cabinet first before installing the Rectifier Module Shelf bolts.
7) If more Rectifier Module Shelves are being installed, repeat Steps 2) through 6)
for each of the additional shelves.
8) In the Distribution Cabinet, tighten the busbar hardware to 180 in-lbs. See
Figures 2-4A and 2-4D.
9) Replace the output busbar shield on the rear of all Rectifier Module Shelves.
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-9
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Distribution Cabinet
(door removed in
illustration for clarity)
Front View
Distribution Cabinet to
Rectifier Shelf Busbar Assy's.
Apply Electrical Anti-Oxidizing
Compound to Busbar Mating Surfaces.
Bottom View of Distribution Cabinet
Do Not Torque Hardware.
Leave Hardware Finger Tight.
3/8-16 x 1-1/2" Bolt
(2 places per busbar assy.)
Typical Busbar Mounting
3/8" Belleville Lock Washer
(2 places per busbar assy.)
Distribution Cabinet to
Rectifier Shelf Busbar Assy.
(Busbar Lengths Vary per Number of
Rectifier Mounting Shelves Installed)
3/8" Flat Washer
(2 places per busbar assy.)
Busbar P/O
Distribution Cabinet
Side View
Figure 2-4A
Installing Distribution Cabinet to Rectifier Module Shelf Busbars
(if not factory installed)
Page 2-10
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Apply Electrical Anti-Oxidizing Compound to
Busbar Mating Surfaces before Mounting Shelf
Rectifier Module Shelf
Remove Shield by
Removing Four Screws
Figure 2-4B
Preparing Rectifier Module Shelf
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-11
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Distribution Cabinet
Rectifier Module Shelf
Mount Rectifier Module Shelves
Starting Directly Beneath Distribution
Cabinet or LMS1000 (if installed)
No. 10/12 Ground Washer
(1 place per side)
(see front view for locations)
12-24 x 3/4" Thread
Forming Hex Head
Screw (2 places per side)
(Torque to 65 in-lbs)
No. 12 Flat Washer
(1 place per side)
(see front view for locations)
Position Ground Washers
as Shown in Front View
Ground
Washer
Ground
Washer
Front View
Figure 2-4C
Installing Rectifier Module Shelves
Page 2-12
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Exploded View Shown to Illustrate Wire Connections Only
Distribution Cabinet
Plug Cable from Distribution Cabinet
into Cable from Rectifier Shelf
Rectifier Shelf
Plug Cable from Upper Rectifier Shelf
into Cable from Lower Rectifier Shelf
Rectifier Shelf
Figure 2-4D
Cable Connections to Rectifier Module Shelf
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-13
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
DO LAST
Torque Hardware Securing Busbars
inside Distribution Cabinet to
180 in-lbs (4 places)
Distribution Cabinet
Rectifier Shelf
Rectifier Shelf
Rear View
1/4" Flat Washer
(2 places per Busbar,
4 places per Rectifier Shelf)
1/4" Belleville Lock Washer
(2 places per Busbar,
4 places per Rectifier Shelf)
Secure Busbars from Distribution Cabinet
to the Rear of the Rectifier Shelf as Shown.
Repeat Hardware Sequence to Secure
Longer Busbars for any Additional Shelves.
Install All Required Hardware
then Torque to 60 in-lbs
(4 places per Rectifier Shelf)
1/4-20 x 1" Bolt
(2 places per Busbar,
4 places per Rectifier Shelf)
Figure 2-4E
Connecting Busbars
Page 2-14
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Mounting List 63 and 64 DC-DC Converter Shelves
If provided, mount the List 63 and List 64 DC-DC Converter Shelves in the Main Bay.
Procedure
1) Mount the List 63 Converter Shelf to the relay rack directly beneath the bottom
Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf, as shown in Figure 2-5A.
2) If a List 64 Converter Shelf is provided, mount to the relay rack directly beneath
the List 63 Converter Shelf, as shown in Figure 2-5A.
3) Locate the two (2) Input Interconnect Busbars provided with List 63 equipment.
Install the busbars per Figure 2-5B. Apply electrical anti-oxidizing compound to
mating surfaces. Torque bolts as shown in the figure.
4) If a List 64 Converter Shelf is provided, locate the two (2) Input Interconnect
Busbars provided with List 64 equipment. Install the busbars per Figure 2-5B.
Apply electrical anti-oxidizing compound to mating surfaces. Torque bolts as
shown in the figure.
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-15
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
MAIN BAY ONLY
Bottom Most Rectifier Module Shelf
List 63 Converter Shelf
(See Detail A for Mounting)
List 64 Converter Shelf
(See Detail A for Mounting)
Front
#12
Ground
Washer
DETAIL A
12-24 x 1/2" Thread
Forming Screw
(4 Places)
#12
Ground
Washer
Figure 2-5A
Mounting List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves
Page 2-16
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
1/4" Flat Washer
1/4" Belleville Lock Washer
1/4-20 Nut
Torque to 60 in-lbs.
1/4" Flat Washer
1/4" Lock Washer
1/4-20 Nut
Torque to 84 in-lbs.
1/4" Flat Washer
1/4" Belleville Lock Washer
1/4-20 Nut
Torque to 60 in-lbs.
Rear
1/4" Flat Washer
1/4" Lock Washer
1/4-20 Nut
Torque to 84 in-lbs.
Notes
Remove all rear shields.
Apply electrical anti-oxidizing
compound to busbar mating surfaces.
Install all required hardware
on all busbars hand-tight,
then torque to specification.
View with
busbars installed.
Figure 2-5B
Installing List 63 and 64 Interconnect Busbars
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-17
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
INSTALLING OPTIONAL
BATTERY BUSBAR EXTENSION KITS,
PART NOS. 514713 AND 529143
These kits provide plates that extend the system busbars above the top of the
Distribution Cabinet and increase the number of lug landings available for battery cables.
The Part No. 514713 kit provides back-to-back landings for up to six lugs per polarity.
The Pat No. 529143 kit provides back-to-back landings for up to 12 lugs per polarity.
Installing Part No. 514713 Busbar Kit
This kit consists of the following:
Qty.
2
12
12
12
Part No.
Description
514712
214204100
214825000
227646800
Busbar extension plates, flat
Flat washer, 3/8” x 1” O.D.
Belleville washer, 3/8”
Hex head bolt, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4”
Perform the following steps to install the battery busbar extension plates. Refer to Figure
2-6 as the procedure is performed.
Procedure
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet front door by turning and holding the latch in the
counterclockwise position.
2) Install busbar extension plates as shown in the figure. Apply anti-oxidizing
compound to busbar mating surfaces before assembling. Tighten bolts to the
recommended torque value shown in the figure.
Note: Install the Belleville lock washers so the concave side is towards the
busbar.
3) Close the Distribution Cabinet access door. The door can be shut without turning
the latch.
Page 2-18
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Apply anti-oxidizing compound to busbar mating surfaces.
Install hardware, 6 places per busbar.
Assembly order:
3/8-16 X 1-1/4" Bolt
3/8" Belleville Washer
3/8" Flat Washer
Extension Plate
System Busbar
Torque to 180 In. Lbs.
FRONT VIEW
48V
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
BUSBAR
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
BUSBAR
(One Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
Figure 2-6
Installing Battery Busbar Extension Kit, Part No. 514713
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-19
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Installing Part No. 529143 Busbar Kit
This kit consists of the following:
Qty.
2
1
12
12
12
2
Part No.
Description
529144
534565
214204100
214825000
227646800
218706300
Busbar extension plates, angled
Shield, battery busbar
Flat washer, 3/8” x 1” O.D.
Belleville washer, 3/8”
Hex head bolt, 3/8-16 x 1-1/4”
Thread-forming screws, 10-32 x 1/2"
Perform the following steps to install the battery busbar extension plates. Refer to Figure
2-7 as the procedure is performed.
Procedure
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet front door by turning and holding the latch in the
counterclockwise position.
2) Install busbar extension plates as shown in the figure. Apply anti-oxidizing
compound to busbar mating surfaces before assembling. Tighten bolts to the
recommended torque value shown in the figure.
Note: Install the Belleville lock washers so the concave side is towards the
busbar.
3) Install the busbar shield as shown in the figure. Loosen two 10-32 screws on the
top of the Distribution Cabinet. Slide slots in the shield under the screw heads.
Tighten the screws.
Note: If the Distribution Cabinet is equipped with a List 29 top cover, use two
kit-furnished 10-32 x 1/2" screws in place of the screws described in this
step.
4) Close the Distribution Cabinet access door. The door can be shut without turning
the latch.
Page 2-20
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
DO FIRST.
INSTALL BUSBAR EXTENSION PLATES
Apply anti-oxidizing compound to busbar mating surfaces.
Install hardware, 6 places per busbar.
Assembly order:
3/8-16 X 1-1/4" Bolt
3/8" Belleville Washer
3/8" Flat Washer
Extension Plate
System Busbar
Torque to 180 In. Lbs.
48V
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
BUSBAR
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
BUSBAR
(One Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
DO SECOND.
INSTALL SHIELD.
Loosen two 6-32 screws
in cabinet top.
Slide slots in shield under
screw heads.
Tighten screws.
Note: If cabinet is
equipped with List 29 top
cover, replace cabinet
screws with longer screws
provided in this kit.
Figure 2-7
Installing Battery Busbar Extension Kit, Part No. 529143
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-21
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
INSTALLING OPTIONAL
LUG ADAPTER BUSBAR KITS,
PART NOS. 514714 AND 534449
These kits provide lug adapter busbars plus hardware for use with 2-pole and 3-pole
circuit breakers.
Installing the Lug Adapter Busbars
Kit P/N 534449 (for 2-pole circuit breakers) consists of the following:
Qty.
1
1
8
4
8
4
4
2
4
2
Part No.
Description
534447
534448
214110100
214112100
215111100
215111300
227640400
227646600
228557100
228567100
Busbar
Busbar
Flat washer, 1/4”
Flat washer, 3/8”
Lock washer, 1/4”
Lock washer, 3/8”
Hex head bolt, 1/4-20 x 3/4”
Hex head bolt, 3/8-16 x 1”
Nut, 1/4-20
Nut, 3/8-16
Kit P/N 514714 (for 3-pole circuit breakers) consists of the following:
Qty.
1
1
12
4
12
4
6
2
6
2
Part No.
Description
514676
514678
214110100
214112100
215111100
215111300
227640400
227646600
228557100
228567100
Busbar
Busbar
Flat washer, 1/4”
Flat washer, 3/8”
Lock washer, 1/4”
Lock washer, 3/8”
Hex head bolt, 1/4-20 x 3/4”
Hex head bolt, 3/8-16 x 1”
Nut, 1/4-20
Nut, 3/8-16
Perform the following steps to install the lug adapter busbars. Refer to Figure 2-8 as the
procedure is performed. Note also the restrictions on location in Figure 2-8.
Procedure
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet front door by turning and holding the latch in the
counterclockwise position.
2) Install the lug adapter busbars as shown in Figure 2-8. Apply anti-oxidizing
compound to busbar mating surfaces before assembling. Recommended torque
is 72 in-lbs using the supplied 1/4” bolts and hardware.
Page 2-22
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
3) Orient the load lug hardware as shown in Figure 2-8. Recommended torque is
300 in-lbs using the supplied 3/8” bolts and hardware.
4) Close the Distribution Cabinet access door. The door can be shut without turning
the latch.
Busbar Adapter
Kit P/N 534449
Busbar Adapter
Kit P/N 514714
Busbar Adapter
Kit P/N 534449
Notes:
Orient busbars as shown.
Shield not shown. Remove breakaway areas from shield
as required. Breakaways are only provided for positions
1-8 and 9-12 in a 20-position panel and 1-8, 9-12, and
23-24 in a 24-position panel. This restricts 2 and 3-pole
breakers to be located in these positions only. Note also
that a shield mounting tab is located between positions
8 and 9, thus a 2 or 3-pole breaker cannot span between
positions 8 and 9.
Circuit breaker locations for reference only.
Figure 2-8
Installing Lug Adapter Busbar Kits
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-23
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
INSTALLING THE OPTIONAL SYSTEM LOAD
SHUNT TEST POINT KIT, P/N 545569 (IF FURNISHED)
If ordered with the power system; this kit is factory installed.
This kit adds a System Load Shunt Test Point circuit card to the Power System. This
circuit card provides a series of test points for measuring the system load shunts with a
multimeter. These test points are accessible from the front of the Distribution Cabinet.
Admonishments
Danger: Installation of this kit should only be performed by a qualified technician
following approved safety procedures.
Performing the following procedure may expose technicians to hazards.
This procedure should be performed by qualified technicians familiar with
the hazards associated with this type of equipment. These hazards may
include shock, energy, and/or burns. To avoid these hazards:
a) The tasks should be performed in the order indicated.
b) Remove watches, rings, and other jewelry.
c) Prior to contacting any uninsulated surface or termination, use a
voltmeter to verify that no voltage or the expected voltage is present.
d) Wear eye protection, and use recommended tools.
e) Use insulated tools.
Installing Kit
This kit consists of the following:
Qty.
1
1
1
1
3
Part No.
Description
545360
545394
545438
223772500
233394000
Test Point Circuit Card
Bracket
Label
#6-32 Locking Nut
#6-32 Screw
Perform the following steps to install the System Load Shunt Test Point Kit. Refer to
Figure 2-9 (Main Bay) and Figure 2-10 (Supplemental Bay) as this procedure is
performed.
Procedure
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet front door by turning and holding the latch in the
counterclockwise position.
Page 2-24
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Danger: Performing the next steps may expose service personnel to battery
potential. Exercise extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have
any tool inadvertently contact any energized electrical termination.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a
suitable ground.
4) Remove the hardware that secures a cover plate at the mounting location of the
Test Point Circuit Card Mounting Bracket. Remove and discard the cover plate
and hardware.
5) Install the Test Point Circuit Card Mounting Bracket, and secure with a kit
supplied screw and locking nut.
6) Orient the Test Point Circuit Card over the Mounting Bracket as shown in Figure
2-9 (Main Bay) or Figure 2-10 (Supplemental Bay). Install the Test Point Circuit
Card to the Mounting Bracket, and secure with kit supplied screws.
7) Route the ribbon cable on the Test Point Circuit Card to the System Quad Shunt
card, and plug it into J2 located on the circuit card. Refer to Figure 2-9 (Main
Bay) or Figure 2-10 (Supplemental Bay).
8) Adhere the kit supplied label to the Distribution Cabinet lower front panel as
shown in Figure 2-9 (Main Bay) or Figure 2-10 (Supplemental Bay).
9) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover to the rear. Tighten the two
screws.
10) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
11) Close the Distribution Cabinet’s front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
12) Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is
finished.
13) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-25
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Main Bay
Rear View
Rear View
Label
1. Remove existing bracket
covering opening and replace
with kit bracket (Use kit supplied
Nut
ing
#6 Screw and #6 Locking Nut.) #6 Lock
2. Secure Test Point Circuit
Card to kit bracket with kit
supplied #6 screws.
Test Point Kit
P/N 545569
#6 Screws
3. Attach Test Point Circuit
Card ribbon cable to
System Quad Shunt Card.
Door and other
components removed
in illustration for clarity.
4. Adhere kit supplied
Test Point label.
Front View
Figure 2-9
Installing the System Load Shunt Test Point Kit in the Main Bay
Page 2-26
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Supplemental Bay
Rear View
Label
1. Remove existing bracket
covering opening and replace
ut
with kit bracket (Use kit supplied
gN
ckin
#6 Screw and #6 Locking Nut.) #6 Lo
Rear View
Test Point Kit
P/N 545569
#6 Screws
2. Secure Test Point Circuit
Card to kit bracket with kit
supplied #6 screws.
3. Attach Test Point Circuit
Card ribbon cable to
System Quad Shunt Card.
Door and other
components removed
in illustration for clarity.
4. Adhere kit supplied
Test Point label.
Front View
Figure 2-10
Installing the System Load Shunt Test Point Kit in a Supplemental Bay
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-27
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
INSTALLING THE LIST 72, LIST 74, LIST 75, LIST 76, LIST 77,
LIST 78, OR RS-485 (P/O LIST 80) MCA INTERFACE OPTION (IF
FURNISHED)
If List 72, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, or 80 is ordered with the power system; this option is
installed at the factory.
To field install these kits, refer to Section 5949. Section 5949 is furnished with each kit.
Section 5949 is also provided in the hardcopy System Installation Manual and can also
be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your
system.
MOUNTING A BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION PROBE
(IF FURNISHED)
Note: For proper operation, the Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation
Probe should be mounted near the batteries.
Procedure
1) Mount the Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe to any
suitable surface located near the battery. One 1/4-inch hole is provided to mount
the probe. Recommended torque is 25 in-lbs, maximum.
MOUNTING A TXM (MULTIPLE PROBE
CONCENTRATOR MODULE) AND PROBES
(IF FURNISHED)
Refer to Section 5940. Section 5940 is provided in the hardcopy System Installation
Manual and can also be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package)
furnished with your system.
Page 2-28
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INSTALLING BULLET NOSE TYPE FUSEHOLDERS
AND TPS/TLS FUSES (IF FURNISHED)
Refer to the illustrations in the MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS chapter for
typical Distribution Cabinet fuse/circuit breaker position numbering schemes.
Refer to the following procedure, and install Bullet Nose Type fuseholders and
appropriately sized TPS/TLS fuses into the proper mounting positions in the Distribution
Cabinet(s). Record all fuse sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
Bullet Nose Type fuseholders and TPS/TLS fuses may have been factory installed for
you. If so, verify their positions and sizes.
Note: Each bus in the Distribution Cabinet is rated for a maximum current of 500
amperes. Each Distribution Cabinet is rated for a maximum of 500 amperes (List
21), 1000 amperes (List 22), 1500 amperes (List 23), or 2000 amperes (List 24).
Procedure
Note: Refer to Figure 2-9 as this procedure is performed.
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Orient the fuseholder so the LOAD designation found on the fuseholder side is at
the top, and the LINE designation is at the bottom. Insert the terminals on the
rear of the fuseholder into their corresponding sockets on the Distribution Row
Assembly. Push fuseholder in firmly until fully seated in the Distribution Row
Assembly.
3) When all fuseholders are installed, install an appropriately sized TPS/TLS fuse in
each. To do this, remove the fuse carrier from the mounted fuseholder body by
pulling it straight out. Slide the fuse in place between the contacts of the fuse
carrier. When done, push the fuse carrier back into the fuseholder body. Note
that a polarizing key on the bottom of the carrier prevents the carrier from being
inserted upside down.
4) Record all fuse sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
5) Verify that an 18/100 ampere alarm fuse is present in each fuseholder, and that a
plastic safety cover is installed on this fuse. Refer to SAG582126000 for part
numbers.
6) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fasteners.
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-29
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Insert These Terminals
in Corresponding Sockets
in Distribution Assembly.
Distribution Fuse
Fuse Carrier
Safety
Cover
Polarizing Keyway
Matches Key on
Bottom of Fuse Carrier
Fuseholder Body
Alarm Fuse
Figure 2-11
Installing a Bullet Nose Type Fuseholder and TPS/TLS Fuse
Page 2-30
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INSTALLING BULLET NOSE TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(IF FURNISHED)
Refer to the illustrations in the MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS chapter for
typical Distribution Cabinet fuse/circuit breaker position numbering schemes.
Caution: Circuit breakers with a rating greater than 150 amperes SHALL HAVE an
empty mounting position between it and any other overcurrent protective
device.
Refer to the following procedure, and install appropriately sized Bullet Nose type circuit
breakers into the proper mounting positions in the Distribution Cabinet(s). Record all
circuit breaker sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
Bullet Nose Type circuit breakers may have been factory installed for you. If so, verify
their positions and sizes.
Note: Each bus in the Distribution Cabinet is rated for a maximum current of 500
amperes. Each Distribution Cabinet is rated for a maximum of 500 amperes (List
21), 1000 amperes (List 22), 1500 amperes (List 23), or 2000 amperes (List 24).
Procedure
Note: Refer to Figure 2-10 as this procedure is performed.
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Ensure that the circuit breaker is in the OFF position, and is of the correct rating.
Orient the circuit breaker so the OFF and ON labeling on the handle is right side
up. Insert the terminals on the rear of the circuit breaker into their corresponding
sockets on the Distribution Row Assembly. Push circuit breaker in firmly until
fully seated in the Distribution Row Assembly.
3) Record all circuit breaker sizes on the card provided within the Distribution
Cabinet(s).
4) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fasteners.
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-31
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Insert These Terminals
in Corresponding Sockets
in Distribution Assembly.
Lettering on Handle
Must Be Right Side Up.
Turn Off Before Installing.
Figure 2-12
Installing a Bullet Nose Type Circuit Breaker
Page 2-32
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INSTALLING GMT FUSE DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY (P/N
509128) ON A BULLET NOSE TYPE DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY
(IF FURNISHED)
The GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly is provided in a kit, P/N 514432, which consists
of...
(1) GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly (P/N 509128)
(1) Ground Return Busbar Link (P/N 514420)
(1) Insulator (P/N 528401)
(1) 1/4-20 x 1/2” Hex Head Machine Screw
(1) 1/4-20 Hex Nut
(2) 1/4” Flat Washers
(2) 1/4” Lock Washers
(1) 1/4-20 x 3/8" Screw
(2) GND Symbol Label (P/N 317304400)
Refer to the following procedure to install the kit. Then install appropriately sized GMT
fuses into the fuseholders on the GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly. Record
all fuse sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
Note: Each P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly is rated for a
maximum current of 30 amperes.
Procedure
Note: Refer to Figure 2-11 as this procedure is performed.
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
Note: Each P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly occupies five
mounting positions on a Bullet Nose Type Distribution Row Assembly. It is
recommended that the fuse assembly be mounted starting at the right side of
the distribution row.
2) Ensure that no load connections have been made to the five Bullet Nose Type
mounting positions into which the P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit
Card Assembly will be installed.
3) Orient the P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly as shown in
Figure 2-11. Insert the four terminals on the rear of the assembly into their
corresponding sockets on the Bullet Nose Type Distribution Row Assembly.
Push the GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly in firmly until fully seated
in the Distribution Row Assembly.
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-33
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
4) On the Bullet Nose Type Distribution Row Assembly, connect a furnished busbar
link between the ground busbar and either of the two linking busbars as shown in
Figure 2-11. Secure with the hardware furnished. Recommended torque is 72
in-lbs.
5) Install the furnished P/N 528401 insulator over the busbars above the GMT Fuse
Distribution Circuit Card Assembly. See detail in Figure 2-11. Secure with the
furnished screw.
6) Adhere the GND Symbol labels to the insulator as shown in Figure 2-11.
7) Install an appropriately sized GMT fuse in each fuse mounting position on the
GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly as required. If dummy fuses are
installed, first remove the dummy fuse.
8) Record all fuse sizes (installed on the GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card
Assembly) on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
9) Verify that a 1/4 ampere alarm fuse is present in fuse position F11 of the GMT
Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly. Refer to SAG582126000 for part
number.
10) Verify that a plastic safety cover is installed on all GMT fuses on the GMT Fuse
Distribution Circuit Card Assembly. Refer to SAG582126000 for part number.
11) Verify that dummy fuses are installed in all unused fuse positions on the GMT
Fuse Distribution Circuit Card Assembly.
12) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fasteners.
Page 2-34
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
NOT
USED
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
NOT LOAD
CONNECTIONS.
USE LINK TO
CONNECT
EITHER ONE
TO GROUND
BUSBAR. (SEE
DETAIL BELOW.)
GROUND
BUSBAR
GMT FUSE DISTRIBUTION
CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY
P/N 509128
GND Symbol Label
INSTALLING
INSULATOR
NOTE:
List AA Distribution Assembly shown
as an example. Procedure same for
all other Bullet Nose Type Distribution
Assemblies.
BUSBAR LINK
INSTALLED
GMT Fuse Circuit Card Assembly
shown in recommended location for
first assembly. Procedure same for all
other mounting locations.
Figure 2-13
Installing a P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly
on a Bullet Nose Type Distribution Row Assembly
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-35
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
INSTALLING TPH FUSES (IF FURNISHED)
Refer to the illustrations in the MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS chapter for
typical Distribution Cabinet fuse/circuit breaker position numbering schemes.
Refer to the following procedure, and install appropriately sized TPH fuses into the proper
fuseholders in the Distribution Cabinet(s). Record all fuse sizes on the card provided
within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
TPH fuses may have been factory installed for you. If so, verify their positions and sizes.
Note: Each bus in the Distribution Cabinet is rated for a maximum current of 500
amperes. Each Distribution Cabinet is rated for a maximum of 500 amperes (List
21), 1000 amperes (List 22), 1500 amperes (List 23), or 2000 amperes (List 24).
Procedure
Note: Refer to Figure 2-12 as this procedure is performed.
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the TPH fuse carrier from the mounted fuseholder body by grasping its
handle and firmly pulling it straight out. Install the TPH fuse into the fuse carrier.
When done, push the fuse carrier securely back into the mounted fuseholder
body.
3) Record all fuse sizes on the card provided within the Distribution Cabinet(s).
4) Verify that a 1/4 ampere alarm fuse is installed in the GMT-type fuseholder
located adjacent to the TPH fuseholder, and that a plastic safety cover is install
on this fuse. Refer to SAG582126000 for part numbers.
5) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fasteners.
Page 2-36
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Fuse
Fuseholder Body
Fuse Carrier
Figure 2-14
Installing a TPH Fuse
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
Page 2-37
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
Page 2-38
Chapter 2. Installing System Components
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
CHAPTER 3
SETTING WIRING OPTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Admonishments............................................................................................................... 3-2
General Safety .......................................................................................................... 3-2
Voltages .................................................................................................................... 3-2
Circuit Card Handling................................................................................................ 3-3
Wiring Options on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532 Located in
Distribution Cabinet(s) ..................................................................................................... 3-3
Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532.................................. 3-3
Internal/External Voltage Sensing and Internal/External System Voltage
Meter Reading Circuit Card P/N 500476 Orientation................................................ 3-3
Fuses and Fuse Alarm Polarity Circuit Card P/N 500477 Orientation...................... 3-4
LVD (J5) Jumper ....................................................................................................... 3-5
Shunt POD (J6) Jumper............................................................................................ 3-6
Final Procedure......................................................................................................... 3-6
Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card P/N 509477 Switches S1 though S4
Settings............................................................................................................................ 3-8
Alarm Termination / Audible Alarm Circuit Card P/N 524734 Jumpers J10 and
J11 Settings (List 71 Only) ............................................................................................ 3-11
MCA Local and Remote Access Lockout Switch S1 Settings on MCA Main
Controller Circuit Card (Main Bay Only) ........................................................................ 3-14
MCA Modem Interface Option "Number of Rings Before Answer" Jumper (Main
Bay Only) ....................................................................................................................... 3-17
MCA RS-232/Modem Interface Option "Number of Rings Before Answer" Jumper
(Main Bay Only)............................................................................................................. 3-19
MCA RS-232/Modem Interface Option "RS-232 Port Hardware Handshake"
Jumper (Main Bay Only)................................................................................................ 3-20
List RD and RE Shunt Monitoring (Shunt POD) Circuit Card Switch Settings.............. 3-22
Shunt Capacity Selection Switches ........................................................................ 3-22
Shunt POD Identification Switch ............................................................................. 3-22
Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card P/N 535250 Switches S1 and S2 Settings ......... 3-25
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
ADMONISHMENTS
General Safety
Danger: TECHNICIANS MUST FOLLOW APPROVED SAFETY PROCEDURES.
Performing the following procedures may expose technicians to hazards.
These procedures should be performed by qualified technicians familiar
with the hazards associated with this type of equipment. These hazards
may include shock, energy, and/or burns. To avoid these hazards:
a) The tasks should be performed in the order indicated.
b) Remove watches, rings, and other jewelry.
c) Prior to contacting any uninsulated surface or termination, use a
voltmeter to verify that no voltage or the expected voltage is present.
d) Wear eye protection, and use recommended tools.
e) Use insulated tools.
(To avoid danger to the installer or damage to the equipment, the
tools used in this procedure should have insulated grips. All exposed
metal shafts, extensions, handles, etc. should be completely insulated
with a minimum of three half-lapped layers of electrical tape. Ensure
that wrenches with more than one working end have only one end
exposed.)
Voltages
AC Input Voltages
Danger: This system operates from AC voltage capable of producing fatal
electrical shock.
DC Input/Output Voltages
Danger: This system produces DC Power and may require battery to be connected
to it. Although the DC voltage is not hazardously high, the Rectifier
Modules and/or battery can deliver large amounts of current. Exercise
extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have any tool
inadvertently contact a battery terminal or exposed wire connected to a
battery terminal. NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact
more than one termination at a time, or to simultaneously contact a
termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary short circuit can
cause explosion and injury.
Page 3-2
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Circuit Card Handling
Warning:
Installation or removal of the circuit cards requires careful handling.
Before handling any circuit card, read and follow the instructions
contained on the Static Warning Page located at the beginning of this
document.
To avoid possibility of circuit card damage from static discharge, a
static wrist strap grounded through a one megohm resistor should
always be worn when handling the circuit cards.
WIRING OPTIONS ON INTERCONNECT/LVD INHIBIT
CIRCUIT CARD P/N 509532 LOCATED IN DISTRIBUTION
CABINET(S)
Perform the following procedures to verify the factory settings and/or make the required
wiring option settings per your site requirements. These procedures can also be used to
make adjustments on a replacement circuit card.
Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532
Procedure
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning: Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a
suitable ground.
Internal/External Voltage Sensing and Internal/External
System Voltage Meter Reading Circuit Card P/N 500476 Orientation
Circuit card P/N 500476 is located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
mounted in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet (the one containing the MCA). Refer to
Figure 3-1.
The orientation of this circuit card determines...

If the Rectifier Modules are sensing output voltage through internal 'Distribution'
wiring (internal), or at a location connected to the system via the external voltage
sensing leads (external).

If the voltage source the MCA displays as "System Output Voltage" is the voltage
source connected through the internal 'Distribution' wiring (internal), or the voltage
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
source connected to the system via the external system voltage meter reading leads
(external).
Procedures are provided later in these instructions detailing connection of external
voltage sensing leads and external system voltage meter reading leads.
Orient this circuit card per site requirements as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
Note: A P/N 509532 circuit card is located in each Distribution Cabinet. Perform this
procedure only on the circuit card located in the Main Bay Distribution
Cabinet. The orientation of circuit card P/N 500476 on circuit card P/N 509532
located in a Supplemental Bay Distribution Cabinet has no effect.
1) If not already done, perform the "Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card
P/N 509532" procedure described above.
2) Refer to Figure 3-1, and locate Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
mounted in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet (the one containing the MCA).
3) Refer to Figure 3-1, and locate the Internal/External Voltage Sensing and
Internal/External System Voltage Meter Reading circuit card P/N 500476
installed on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 at J4.
4) For Internal Voltage Sensing and Internal System Voltage Meter Reading:
Orient the circuit card so that the SENSE ARROW points to INT.
For External Voltage Sensing and External System Voltage Meter Reading:
Orient the circuit card so that the SENSE ARROW points to EXT.
5) If there are no more adjustments to circuit card P/N 509532, perform the "Final
Procedure" procedure described below.
Fuses and Fuse Alarm Polarity Circuit Card P/N 500477 Orientation
Note: This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to
verify the settings or to make adjustments on a replacement circuit card.
Circuit card P/N 500477 is located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
mounted in each Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure 3-1.
The orientation of this circuit card sets the proper polarity for the fuses and fuse alarm
circuits.
Orient this circuit card as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
Note: A P/N 509532 circuit card is located in each Distribution Cabinet. Perform this
procedure on the circuit card located in each Distribution Cabinet.
1) If not already done, perform the "Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card
P/N 509532" procedure described above.
Page 3-4
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
2) Refer to Figure 3-1, and locate Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
mounted in each Distribution Cabinet.
3) Refer to Figure 3-1, and locate the Fuses and Fuse Alarm circuit card P/N
500477 installed on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 at J7.
4) Orient the circuit card so that the SYSTEM ARROW points to -48V. (System
distribution voltage in this power system is -48V.)
5) If there are no more adjustments to circuit card P/N 509532, perform the "Final
Procedure" procedure described below.
6) If the system consists of other Distribution Cabinets, set this option as required
on each cabinet.
LVD (J5) Jumper
Note: This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to
verify the settings or to make adjustments on a replacement circuit card.
This jumper is located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 mounted in
each Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure 3-1.
Set this jumper as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
Note: A P/N 509532 circuit card is located in each Distribution Cabinet. Perform this
procedure on the circuit card located in each Distribution Cabinet.
1) If not already done, perform the "Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card
P/N 509532" procedure described above.
2) Refer to Figure 3-1, and locate Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
mounted in each Distribution Cabinet.
3) Refer to Figure 3-1, and locate connector J5 on this circuit card.
4) If the Distribution Cabinet that contains this circuit card:

Is the last cabinet that contains Low Voltage Disconnect circuit cards, or if
the system only consists of this cabinet and contains Low Voltage
Disconnect circuit cards, place the supplied jumper between pins 1 and 2 of
J5.

Has NO Low Voltage Disconnect circuit cards, or contains Low Voltage
Disconnect circuit cards but is NOT the last cabinet in the system, place the
supplied jumper on pins 2 and 3 of J5.
5) If there are no more adjustments to circuit card P/N 509532, perform the "Final
Procedure" procedure described below.
6) If the system consists of other Distribution Cabinets, set this option as required
on each cabinet.
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-5
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Shunt POD (J6) Jumper
Note: This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to
verify the settings or to make adjustments on a replacement circuit card.
This jumper is located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 mounted in
each Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure 3-1.
Set this jumper as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
Note: A P/N 509532 circuit card is located in each Distribution Cabinet. Perform this
procedure on the circuit card located in each Distribution Cabinet.
1) If not already done, perform the "Accessing Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card
P/N 509532" procedure described above.
2) Refer to Figure 3-1, and locate Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
mounted in each Distribution Cabinet.
3) Refer to Figure 3-1, and locate connector J6 on this circuit card.
4) If the Distribution Cabinet containing this circuit card:

DOES NOT contain a Shunt POD circuit card, place the supplied jumper
between pins 1 and 2 of J6.

DOES contain a Shunt POD circuit card, place the supplied jumper between
pins 2 and 3 of J6.
5) If there are no more adjustments to circuit card P/N 509532, perform the "Final
Procedure" procedure described below.
6) If the system consists of other Distribution Cabinets, set this option as required in
each cabinet.
Final Procedure
Procedure
1) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
2) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
3) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
Page 3-6
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
J6 Jumper Settings
BAY HAS
SHUNT POD
CIRCUIT CARD
BAY DOES
NOT HAVE
SHUNT POD
CIRCUIT CARD
3
3
2
2
1
1
Internal/External
Voltage Sensing and
Internal/External
System Voltage
Meter Reading
Circuit Card
P/N 500476
INTERCONNECT/LVD
INHIBIT CIRCUIT
CARD, P/N 509532
J13
J8
J10
J9
Fuses and Fuse Alarm
Polarity Circuit Card
P/N 500477
J3
-48V
J1
J7
INT.
J2
J4
J5 Jumper Settings
BAY HAS
NO LVD OR IS
NOT LAST LVD
IN SYSTEM
BAY HAS THE
ONLY LVD OR
THE LAST LVD
IN SYSTEM
3
3
2
2
1
1
J5 J6
+24V
EXT.
J12
Figure 3-1
Wiring Options on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card P/N 509532
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-7
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
QUAD LOW VOLTAGE DISCONNECT CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509477 SWITCHES S1 THOUGH S4 SETTINGS
Note: This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to
verify the settings or to make adjustments on a replacement circuit card.
The MCA provides three separate LVD disconnect levels (with separate A and B side
adjustable setpoints for each level) and one adjustable global reconnect setpoint. The
levels are designated LVD1, LVD2, and LVD3.
A Quad Low Voltage Disconnect circuit card P/N 509477 is provided in each Distribution
Cabinet that…

Contains one or more distribution rows having an LVD contactor, or

Controls an LVD contactor located on an associated Battery Stand.
Four switches, S1-S4, are provided on each Quad Low Voltage Disconnect circuit card.
The setting of these switches determines which of the three available disconnect levels
controls the contactor in the corresponding distribution row or battery stand, as shown in
Table 3-1.
Refer to Figure 3-2 for location of switches S1-S4 on circuit card P/N 509477.
Set these switches as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning: Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a
suitable ground.
4) Refer to Figure 3-2, and locate Quad Low Voltage Disconnect circuit card P/N
509477. Locate switches S1 through S4 on the circuit card.
5) Set the switches per Table 3-1. Be sure to set all four switches on the circuit
card, regardless of the number of LVD contactors and/or distribution rows in the
cabinet.
6) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
Page 3-8
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
7) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
8) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
9) If the system consists of other Distribution Cabinets containing (or controlling)
LVD contactor(s), set the switches on the Quad Low Voltage Disconnect circuit
card installed in these cabinets as required.
Switch S1
Controls LVD Contactor in Row 1
or an Associated Battery Stand, if present
Setting
Control Disabled
(Set here if no row present or row has no LVD.)
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD1 A/B Settings
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD2 A/B Settings
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD3 A/B Settings
Section 1 of S1
Section 2 of S1
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Switch S2
Controls LVD Contactor in Row 2, if present
Setting
Control Disabled
(Set here if no row present or row has no LVD.)
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD1 A/B Settings
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD2 A/B Settings
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD3 A/B Settings
Section 1 of S2
Section 2 of S2
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Switch S3
Controls LVD Contactor in Row 3, if present
Setting
Control Disabled
(Set here if no row present or row has no LVD.)
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD1 A/B Settings
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD2 A/B Settings
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD3 A/B Settings
Section 1 of S3
Section 2 of S3
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Switch S4
Controls LVD Contactor in Row 4, if present
Setting
Control Disabled
(Set here if no row present or row has no LVD.)
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD1 A/B Settings
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD2 A/B Settings
Contactor Controlled by MCA LVD3 A/B Settings
Section 1 of S4
Section 2 of S4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Table 3-1
Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card P/N 509477 Switches S1 - S4 Settings
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-9
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
QUAD LVD CIRCUIT
CARD, P/N 509477
SWITCH S2
OFF
ON
SWITCH S1
OFF
ON
SECTION 1
SECTION 1
SECTION 2
SECTION 2
SECTION 1
SECTION 1
SECTION 2
SECTION 2
OFF
ON
SWITCH S4
OFF
ON
SWITCH S3
Figure 3-2
Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card P/N 509477 Switches S1 - S4 Location
Page 3-10
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
ALARM TERMINATION / AUDIBLE ALARM CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 524734 JUMPERS J10 AND J11 SETTINGS (LIST 71 ONLY)
NOTE THAT LIST 10 AND 11 MCA's PROVIDE AUDIBLE ALARM RELAY
CONTACTS. LIST 12 AND 13 MCA's DO NOT. AN AUDIBLE ALARM IS ONLY
AVAILABLE WHEN LIST 10 OR 11 MCA IS FURNISHED.
List 71 provides Alarm Termination / Audible Alarm circuit card P/N 524734 installed in
the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. This circuit card contains a local audible alarm
sounding device, plus connection points for a remote audible alarm sounding device (List
10 and 11 MCA's only). Located on this circuit card are jumpers J10 and J11.
Placement of these jumpers determines if the local or remote audible alarm sounding
device is active.
Caution: List 12 and List 13 MCA's do not provide an audible alarm function. For
correct external alarm operation, jumpers J10 and J11 must be set to the
REMOTE position when the power system is equipped with List 12 or List
13 MCA.
Refer to Figure 3-3 for location of jumpers J10 and J11 on circuit card P/N 524734.
Set the jumpers per site requirements as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
1) Open the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the
captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning: Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a
suitable ground.
4) Refer to Figure 3-3, and locate Alarm Termination / Audible Alarm circuit card
P/N 524734 mounted in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet.
5) Refer to Figure 3-3, and locate connectors J10 and J11 on this circuit card.

For LOCAL audible alarm operation: Place the jumper on J10 between pins
1 and 2. Place the jumper on J11 between pins 1 and 2.

For REMOTE audible alarm operation: Place the jumper on J10 between
pins 2 and 3. Place the jumper on J11 between pins 2 and 3.
(Use this setting if the power system contains a List 12 or List 13 MCA.)
6) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-11
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
7) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
8) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
Page 3-12
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
ALARM TERMINATION/
AUDIBLE ALARM
CIRCUIT CARD,
P/N 524734
1
2
3
J4
J5
J3
1
Select
Local
Alarm
J10
2
3
J11
or
J8
1
2
J1
J10 J11
J2
1
Select
Remote
Alarm
3
J10
2
3
J11
Figure 3-3
Alarm Termination / Audible Alarm Circuit Card P/N 509539 Jumpers J10 and J11 Location
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-13
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
MCA LOCAL AND REMOTE ACCESS LOCKOUT SWITCH S1
SETTINGS ON MCA MAIN CONTROLLER CIRCUIT CARD (MAIN
BAY ONLY)
The MCA Main Controller circuit card installed in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet
contains switch S1. This switch allows you to enable/disable changing system settings
via the MCA's Local Interface Pad (locally) and enable/disable changing system settings
via the MCA's remote interface port(s) (remotely).
Refer to Figure 3-4 for switch S1 location.
Set the switch settings per site requirements as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
Note: When performing any step in this procedure that requires removal of existing
hardware, retain all hardware for use in subsequent steps.
1) Open the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the
captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning: Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a
suitable ground.
4) Locate the metal bracket that is under the Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card.
Loosen but do not remove the four Phillips screws that secure the metal
bracket. Remove the metal bracket with the Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card
by sliding toward the rear of the MCA assembly until the screw heads clear the
slots in the bracket. Lift the bracket and circuit card to gain access to switch S1
on the MCA Main Controller circuit card that is beneath the bracket.
5) Refer to Figure 3-4, and locate switch S1 on the MCA Main Controller circuit
card.

To disable changing system settings locally, place section 2 of S1 in the ON
position.
To enable changing system settings locally, place section 2 of S1 in the OFF
position.

To disable changing system settings remotely, place switch 3 of S1 in the ON
position.
To enable changing system settings remotely, place switch 3 of S1 in the
OFF position.
Page 3-14
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
6) Reinstall the previously removed metal bracket and Rectifier Shelf Interface
circuit card. To do so, place the bracket on its four mounting posts so that the
mounting screw heads pass through the slots in the bracket. Slide the bracket
toward the front of the MCA assembly. Tighten the four screws.
7) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
8) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
9) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-15
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
S1
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
1
SECTION 1 OF S1
(UNDEFINED)
2
SECTION 2 OF S1
LOCAL ACCESS
OFF = ENABLED
3
SECTION 3 OF S1
REMOTE ACCESS
OFF = ENABLED
ON = DISABLED
4
SECTION 4 OF S1
(UNDEFINED)
OFF
ON = DISABLED
ON
SWITCH S1 (LOCATED
BENEATH CIRCUIT CARD
AND METAL SHIELD)
LOOSEN (4) SCREWS TO
REMOVE CIRCUIT CARD
AND METAL SHIELD
Rectifier Shelf
Interface Circuit
Card and Metal Shield
MCA
Main Controller
Circuit Card
Main Bay Panel
Figure 3-4
Location of MCA Remote and Local Access Lockout Switch S1 on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card
Page 3-16
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
MCA MODEM INTERFACE OPTION "NUMBER OF RINGS
BEFORE ANSWER" JUMPER (MAIN BAY ONLY)
This jumper is located on the Modem circuit card (if furnished). This circuit card is
located in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet.
The placement of this jumper determines the number of rings before the modem answers
an incoming telephone call.
Refer to Figure 3-5 for jumper location.
Set this jumper per site requirements as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
1) Open the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the
captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning: Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a
suitable ground.
4) Refer to Figure 3-5, and locate J3 on the Modem circuit card.

To set the modem to answer on 1 ring, remove the jumper from the two pins
of J3. The jumper may be stored on one of the pins. This is the factory
setting.

To set the modem to answer on 5 rings, place the jumper provided on the
two pins of J3.
Note: When the MCA modem is set to answer on 5 rings, add the following
to the end of the modem initialization string set in WinLink: S7=60.
5) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
6) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
7) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-17
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
MODEM
CIRCUIT CARD,
P/N 486781300
J3, "Number
of Rings Before
Answer" Jumper
Figure 3-5
Modem Circuit Card "Number of Rings before Answer" Jumper Location
Page 3-18
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
MCA RS-232/MODEM INTERFACE OPTION "NUMBER OF
RINGS BEFORE ANSWER" JUMPER (MAIN BAY ONLY)
This jumper is located on the RS-232/Modem circuit card assembly (if furnished). This
circuit card is located in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet.
The placement of this jumper determines the number of rings before the modem answers
an incoming telephone call.
Refer to Figure 3-6 for jumper location.
Set this jumper per site requirements as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
1) Open the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the
captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning: Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a
suitable ground.
4) Refer to Figure 3-6, and locate J3 on the RS-232/Modem circuit card assembly.

To set the modem to answer on 1 ring, remove the jumper from the pins 1
and 2 of J3. The jumper may be stored on one of the pins.

To set the modem to answer on 5 rings, place the jumper provided between
pins 1 and 2 of J3.
Note:
When the MCA modem is set to answer on 5 rings, add the following
to the end of the modem initialization string set in WinLink: S7=60.
5) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
6) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
7) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-19
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
MCA RS-232/MODEM INTERFACE OPTION "RS-232 PORT
HARDWARE HANDSHAKE" JUMPER (MAIN BAY ONLY)
This jumper is located on the RS-232/Modem circuit card assembly (if furnished). This
circuit card is located in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet.
The placement of this jumper determines if the RS-232 Port Hardware Handshaking is
enabled or disabled.
Refer to Figure 3-6 for jumper location.
Set this jumper per site requirements as described in the following procedure. Note that
for use with WinLink, Hardware Handshaking is not required.
Procedure
1) Open the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the
captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning: Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a
suitable ground.
4) Refer to Figure 3-6, and locate J3 on the RS-232/Modem circuit card assembly.

To enable Hardware Handshaking, remove the jumper from the pins 3 and 4
of J3. The jumper may be stored on one of the pins.

To disable Hardware Handshaking, place the jumper provided between pins
3 and 4 of J3.
5) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
6) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
7) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
Page 3-20
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
VIEW WITH DOOR
OPEN, LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM
OF CABINET
MODEM/RS-232
INTERFACE ASSEMBLY
1
J3 Pins 3 and 4
RS-232 Port
Hardware
Handshake
J3 Pins 1 and 2
Modem Port
Number of Rings
before Answer
Jumper OFF:
RTS/CTS
Hardware
Handshake
5
Jumper ON:
NO
Hardware
Handshake
Jumper OFF:
One (1)
Ring
4
3
2
1
6
9
RS-232/Modem
Assembly
J3
Jumper ON:
Five (5)
Rings
Figure 3-6
RS-232/Modem Circuit Card Assembly
"Modem Number of Rings Before Answering" and
"RS-232 Port Hardware Handshake" Jumper Locations
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-21
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
LIST RD AND RE SHUNT MONITORING (SHUNT POD)
CIRCUIT CARD SWITCH SETTINGS
List RD and RE are equipped with a Shunt Monitoring (Shunt POD) Circuit Card, P/N
501981. The MCA is capable of monitoring up to sixteen shunts. The MCA separately
identifies shunts connected to system voltage distribution, those connected to subsystem
voltage distribution, and those connected to battery. To access the Shunt POD circuit
card in a List RD or RE, remove the rear cover from the assembly (shown removed in
Figure 3-7). Reinstall cover after switch settings have been checked.
Shunt Capacity Selection Switches
Note: This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to
verify the settings or to make adjustments on a replacement circuit card.
Located on each Shunt POD circuit card P/N 501981 are two switches. These switches
allow the Shunt POD circuit card to be used with a variety of shunt sizes. The switches
are factory set to match the shunt factory connected to the circuit card. The following
procedure is provided to check the factory setting, or to set the switches on a
replacement Shunt POD.
Procedure
1) Refer to Figure 3-7, and locate Switches S1 and S2 on Shunt POD circuit card
P/N 501981.
2) Refer to Table 3-2, and set the switches to match the capacity of the shunt
connected to this circuit card.
Note:
Factory setting of this switch is as follows (2000A/25mV.):
Switch S2 Section 3: “Open”
Switch S1: “C”
Shunt POD Identification Switch
Note: This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to
verify the settings or to make adjustments on a replacement circuit card.
Located on each Shunt POD circuit card P/N 501981 is a DIP switch. The settings of two
sections of this DIP switch determines how the MCA identifies this Shunt POD (and the
shunt connected to it). The Shunt POD can be identified as monitoring system load
current, subsystem load current, or battery current. This switch is factory set. The
following procedure is provided to check the factory setting, or to set the switch on a
replacement Shunt POD. Refer to Figure 3-7 for circuit card location and switch
identification.
Note: Section 1 of switch S2 is not used in this assembly.
Page 3-22
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Procedure
1) Refer to Figure 3-7, and locate Switch S2 on Shunt POD circuit card P/N 501981.
2) Refer to Table 3-3 and set switch S2 for the type of shunt.
Note:
Factory setting of these switch sections is for “+ Battery Current”.
Switch S2
Section 3
Position
Switch
S1
Position
25mV.
Shunt
Capacity
50mV.
Shunt
Capacity
Switch S2
Section 3
Position
Switch
S1
Position
25mV.
Shunt
Capacity
50mV.
Shunt
Capacity
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
50A
100A
150A
200A
250A
300A
400A
500A
600A
800A
1000A
1500A
2000A
2500A
4000A
5000A
100A
200A
300A
400A
500A
600A
800A
1000A
1200A
1600A
2000A
3000A
4000A
5000A
8000A
10000A
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
400A
650A
1200A
1250A
1300A
1600A
2000A
2600A
3000A
3750A
4000A
5000A
6000A
7500A
8000A
10000A
800A
1300A
2400A
2500A
2600A
3200A
4000A
5200A
6000A
7500A
8000A
10000A
12000A
15000A
16000A
20000A
Table 3-2
Shunt POD Circuit Card P/N 501981
Shunt Capacity Selection Switch Settings
Switch S2
Section 2
Section 4
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Shunt Type
+ Battery Current
– Battery Current
System Load Current
Subsystem Load Current
Table 3-3
Shunt POD Circuit Card P/N 501981
Shunt Type Identification Switch Settings
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-23
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
REAR VIEW OF LIST RD
(COVER REMOVED)
OPEN
1
2
3
4
CLOSED
SHUNT MONITORING (SHUNT POD)
CIRCUIT CARD (PART NO. 501981)
1
2
3 4
SWITCH
S1
SWITCH
S2
Figure 3-7
List RD and RE Shunt POD Circuit Card Switch Location
Page 3-24
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
RECTIFIER SHELF INTERFACE CIRCUIT CARD P/N 535250
SWITCHES S1 AND S2 SETTINGS
Note: This procedure has been performed at the factory. You may use the procedure to
verify the settings or to make adjustments on a replacement circuit card.
A Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card is installed in each bay. Two switches (S1 and S2)
are provided on this circuit card. The setting of these switches determines the bays
beginning rectifier addressing number.
Refer to Figure 3-8 for location of switches S1 and S2 on circuit card P/N 535250.
Set these switches as described in the following procedure.
Procedure
1) Open the Distribution Cabinet's front door by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
Warning: Damage to a circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
3) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a
suitable ground.
4) Refer to Figure 3-8, and locate switches S1 and S2 on the Rectifier Shelf
Interface circuit card. Set the switches in the main bay as follows: set switch S2
to 0 and switch S1 to 1 (this sets rectifier addressing in this bay starting at 01).
Set the switches in the supplemental bay as follows: set switch S2 to 4 and
switch S1 to 1 (this sets rectifier addressing in this bay starting at 41). Note that
when a rectifier is replaced with a new rectifier, it is initially assigned the next
available address respective to that bay. You then are prompted to replace the
new rectifier with the old address. That is why rectifier addressing in the
supplemental bay starts at 41 instead of 37.
5) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
6) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
7) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
Page 3-25
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
S2
S1
6
5
4
7 8
3 2
9
0
1
Figure 3-8
Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card P/N 535250 Switches S1 and S2 Location
Page 3-26
Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
CHAPTER 4
MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Admonishments............................................................................................................... 4-3 Wiring Considerations ..................................................................................................... 4-4 Relay Rack Grounding Connection (Frame Ground) ...................................................... 4-4 External Connections to List 80 LMS1000 Monitoring System (If Furnished)................. 4-4 AC Input and AC Input Equipment Grounding Connections ........................................... 4-5 Connections to 588705000 List 11 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting
Shelves ..................................................................................................................... 4-5 Connections to 588705000 List 1 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting
Shelves (when 582126000 List 45 AC Input Termination Panel is NOT
provided) ................................................................................................................... 4-6 Connections to 582126000 List 45 (Single-Phase) Top Mount AC Input
Termination Panel ..................................................................................................... 4-9 Connections to 588705000 List 3 (Three-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting
Shelves (when 582126000 List 46 AC Input Termination Panel is NOT
provided) ................................................................................................................. 4-12 Connections to 582126000 List 46 (Three-Phase) Top Mount AC Input
Termination Panel ................................................................................................... 4-15 External Alarm, Reference, and Control Connections .................................................. 4-18 Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe or TXM (Multiple
Probe Concentrator Module) Connection (if required)............................................ 4-20 Connections to Terminal Block TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card
P/N 509532 ............................................................................................................. 4-20 Connections to J8 on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 (if List
71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination Circuit Card is NOT Provided) ..................... 4-24 Connections to Terminal Blocks J1-J4 on Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination
Circuit Card P/N 524734 (List 71 only) ................................................................... 4-36 Battery Disconnect External Alarm Connections to List RB, RC, RD, or RE (if
furnished) ................................................................................................................ 4-45 Load Shunt Connections (Shunted GJ/218 Circuit Breakers and/or List AJ
and CJ Distribution Bus Panels) (if furnished) ........................................................ 4-46 Interbay and Bay-to-Bay Cable Connections ................................................................ 4-51 Factory Connected Interbay Cables ....................................................................... 4-52 Customer Connected Bay-to-Bay Cables............................................................... 4-56 Connections to List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves ........................................................ 4-60 Connecting List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves Alarm Cable Harness .................... 4-60 Connecting List 63 and 64 Converter Shelf Output Cables.................................... 4-60 Installing Bay-to-Bay Busbars (List 2 Only)................................................................... 4-64 Cable Connection(s) to the MCA Interface Option........................................................ 4-66 RS-485 MCA Interface Option Connection (List 80 Only) ...................................... 4-66 Modem MCA Interface Option Connection (Lists 72 and 74 Only)......................... 4-66 RS-232 MCA Interface Option Connection (List 74 Only) ...................................... 4-68 Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Ethernet MCA Interface Option Connection (Lists 75-78 Only).............................. 4-69 Load Connections to Distribution Cabinet(s)................................................................. 4-70 Distribution Assemblies Wiring Illustrations ............................................................ 4-71 Connecting Loads to Distribution Assemblies Equipped with Bullet Nose
Type Distribution Devices (TPS/TLS Fuses and/or Bullet Nose-Type Circuit
Breakers)................................................................................................................. 4-71 Connecting Loads to Distribution Assemblies Equipped with TPH-Type
Distribution Fuse Mounting Blocks and/or GJ/218-Type Distribution Circuit
Breaker Mounting Blocks ........................................................................................ 4-72 Connecting Loads to a P/N 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Circuit Card
Assembly................................................................................................................. 4-72 Connecting Loads to Bulk Feed Distribution Assemblies ....................................... 4-72 Battery Connections to Power System.......................................................................... 4-88 If NO Internal Battery Disconnect Device is Provided ............................................ 4-88 If Internal Battery Disconnect Fuses or Circuit Breakers are Provided .................. 4-89 If an Internal Battery Disconnect Contactor is Provided (List RA, RB, RC, RD,
RE) .......................................................................................................................... 4-90 If a Lorain Battery Stand Under Power System is Provided (List 92) ..................... 4-90 Installing Rear Busbar Shield onto the LMS1000 (List 80) ........................................... 4-96 Installing Bay-to-Bay Busbar Covers (List 2 Only) ........................................................ 4-97 Installing and Connecting Batteries in List 93 (If Provided)........................................... 4-98 Admonishments ...................................................................................................... 4-98 Battery Manufacturer Information ........................................................................... 4-98 Installing and Connecting Batteries ........................................................................ 4-99 Installing Optional Front Battery Cover (23” Trays Only)...................................... 4-101 Installing Optional Circuit Breaker Guard ............................................................. 4-102 Installing External Shunt Monitoring Kit P/N 541134 .................................................. 4-103 Kit Contents........................................................................................................... 4-103 Installation Procedure ........................................................................................... 4-103 Page 4-2
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
ADMONISHMENTS
Danger: INSTALLERS MUST FOLLOW APPROVED SAFETY PROCEDURES.
This system operates from AC voltage capable of producing fatal
electrical shock. AC input power must be completely disconnected from
the branch circuits wiring used to provide power to the system before any
electrical connections are made. DO NOT apply AC power to the system
until all electrical connections have been completed and checked.
This system may also require battery to be connected. Although battery
voltage is not hazardously high, the battery can deliver large amounts of
current. Exercise extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have
any tool inadvertently contact a battery terminal or exposed wire
connected to a battery terminal. NEVER allow a metal object, such as a
tool, to contact more than one termination at a time, or to simultaneously
contact a termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary short
circuit can cause explosion and injury. Remove watches, rings, or other
jewelry before connecting battery leads. Make the DC (battery)
connections last. Make all other electrical connections without DC input
power applied to the system.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
WIRING CONSIDERATIONS
For wire size, branch circuit protection, crimp lug, and general wiring recommendations;
refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000. The SAG can be accessed from the
CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
All wiring and branch circuit protection should follow the current edition of the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) approved National Fire Protection Association's
(NPFA) National Electrical Code (NEC), and applicable local codes. For operation in
countries where the NEC is not recognized, follow applicable codes.
RELAY RACK GROUNDING CONNECTION (FRAME GROUND)
Note: Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 for crimp lugs. Refer to
drawing 031110100 for lug crimping information. Refer to drawings 031110200
and 031110300 for additional lug information. The SAG and Engineering
Drawings can be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package)
furnished with your system. A copy of drawings 031110100, 031110200, and
031110300 are also located in the hardcopy INSTALLATION MANUAL for your
convenience.
For relay rack grounding requirements, refer to the current edition of the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) approved National Fire Protection Association's
(NPFA) National Electrical Code (NEC), applicable local codes, and your specific site
requirements.
A customer's grounding network lead can be attached to the top of each relay rack.
Provision is made for installing a lead with a two-hole lug that has 1/4" bolt clearance
holes on 5/8" centers. When using 1/4-inch hardware, recommended torque is 84 in-lbs
when a standard flat washer and lock washer are used.
Note: The DC return connection to this system can remain isolated from system frame
and chassis (DC-I).
Note: This system is suitable for installation as part of the Common Bonding Network
(CBN).
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS TO LIST 80
LMS1000 MONITORING SYSTEM (IF FURNISHED)
Refer to the separate documentation provided with the LMS1000.
Page 4-4
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
AC INPUT AND AC INPUT EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
Note: Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 and Power Data Sheet
PD588705000 for recommended wire size and branch circuit protection. These
can be accessed from the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with
your system.
Connections to 588705000 List 11 (Single-Phase)
Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves
Spec No. 588705000 List 11 Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf is provided with six (6)
factory installed AC input line cords (one for each Rectifier Module position). Plug each
AC line cord into a properly wired AC outlet or distribution box. Refer to Figure 4-1.
Rectifier
Module 4
Rectifier
Module 5
Rear View
Rectifier
Module 6
Rectifier
Module 1
Rectifier
Module 2
Rectifier
Module 3
Note: Rectifier Module mounting positions are numbered
left to right as viewed from front of shelf.
Figure 4-1
AC Input Connections to a 588705000 List 11 (Single Phase) Rectifier Mounting Shelf
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-5
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Connections to 588705000 List 1 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting
Shelves (when 582126000 List 45 AC Input Termination Panel is NOT
provided)
Spec No. 588705000 List 1 Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf provides a separate AC
input connection for each Rectifier Module. Circular openings are provided in the side
panels (side feed) and rear covers (rear feed) of the Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf for
AC input and AC input equipment grounding conductors. The openings accept 3/4" inch
conduit fittings. It is recommended that AC input wiring be provided to all Rectifier
Module mounting positions, including currently unused positions. This wiring will ease
future installation of Rectifier Modules to meet increased load requirements.
Note: A grounding conductor must be provided with each AC input feed.
PROCEDURE
Refer to Figure 4-2 as these procedures are performed.
Note: Repeat the following procedures for each Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf in the
Power System.
Accessing Connections and Routing Wire
1) Remove the two AC Input Access Covers from the rear of the Rectifier Module
Mounting Shelf by first removing the screws that secure them.
2) Install conduit fittings in the side or rear openings as required. Plug buttons are
provided, and must be installed in the openings not being used.
3) Route wiring into the shelf through the previously installed conduit fittings.
Making AC Input Connections
Note: In each shelf, Rectifier Module mounting positions are number 1-6 from left to
right as viewed from the front.
1) Make AC input connections as shown in Table 4-1. Connect each wire by
inserting the stripped end into the wire opening, and then tightening the screw.
Recommended torque is 10 in-lbs.
Making AC Equipment Grounding Connections
Note: Make equipment grounding connections to earth ground, not to the branch
circuit neutral conductor.
1) Connect AC input equipment grounding leads to the frame ground studs using
installer-provided ring lugs and factory-supplied mounting hardware.
Recommended torque is 23 in-lbs.
Page 4-6
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Reinstalling Covers
1) After all AC input and equipment grounding connections have been made and
checked, reinstall the two AC Input Access Covers on the back of the shelf.
Secure with the previously removed screws.
Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
Left Side as
Viewed from Rear
PCU 4
PCU 5
PCU 6
1
2
1
2
1
2
208/240 VAC Service Type:

Line to Line:
Connect Line 1 to Terminal 1.
Connect Line 2 to Terminal 2.

Line to Neutral:
Connect Line to Terminal 1.
Connect Neutral to Terminal 2.
Right Side as
Viewed from Rear
1
2
1
2
1
2
PCU 1
PCU 2
PCU 3
Table 4-1
AC Input Connections to a 588705000 List 1 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-7
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Hole for 3/4"
Conduit Fitting
(AC Input)
Rear View
Hole for 3/4"
Conduit Fitting
(AC Input)
Rear View
Rectifier
Module 4
AC
IN
Rectifier
Module 5
Rectifier
Module 6
1
2
1
2
1
2
PCU 4
1
2
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 6
1
2
FRAME GROUND CONNECTION
ONE 10-32 X 3/4" STUD
AND HARDWARE,
PER SIDE
1
PCU 1
2
1
PCU 2
2
1
PCU 3
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
Rectifier
Module 1
Rectifier
Module 2
AC
IN
Rectifier
Module 3
Note: Rectifier Module mounting positions are numbered
left to right as viewed from front of shelf.
Figure 4-2
AC Input and Equipment Grounding Connections to a
588705000 List 1 (Single-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
Page 4-8
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Connections to 582126000 List 45 (Single-Phase)
Top Mount AC Input Termination Panel
582126000 List 45 consists of a pre-wired, top-mount, AC input termination panel. The
panel provides a separate AC input connection for each Rectifier Module (6 Rectifier
Module Mounting Shelves per bay, 6 Rectifier Modules per shelf, for a total of 36 AC
input feeds per bay). Circular openings are provided in the top of the panel for AC input
and AC input grounding conductors. The openings accept 3/4" inch conduit fittings. It is
recommended that AC input wiring be provided to all Rectifier Module mounting
positions, including currently unused positions. This wiring will ease future installation of
Rectifier Modules to meet increased load requirements.
Note: A grounding conductor must be provided with each AC input feed.
PROCEDURE
Refer to Figure 4-3 as these procedures are performed.
Note: Wiring to Rectifier Module Mounting Positions 1-3 in each shelf are made in the
left-hand side of the top access panel. Wiring to Rectifier Module Mounting
Positions 4-6 in each shelf are made in the right-hand side of the top access
panel, as viewed from the front of the system.
Accessing Connections and Routing Wire
1) Remove the two AC Input Access Covers from the AC Input Termination Panel
by first loosening the captive fastener that secures each of them.
2) Install conduit fittings as required in the top of the AC Input Termination Panel.
Plug buttons are provided, and must be installed in the openings not being used.
3) Route wiring into the AC Input Termination Panel through the previously installed
conduit fittings.
Making AC Input Connections
Note: In each rack, Rectifier Module shelves are numbered 1-6 from top to bottom.
In each shelf, Rectifier Module mounting positions are number 1-6 from left to
right as viewed from the front.
1) Make AC input connections as shown in Table 4-2. Connect each wire by
inserting the stripped end into the wire opening, and then tightening the screw.
Recommended torque is 10 in-lbs.
Making AC Equipment Grounding Connections
Note: Make equipment grounding connections to earth ground, not to the branch
circuit neutral conductor.
1) Connect AC input equipment grounding leads to the GND BAR terminal blocks
provided. Connect each wire by inserting the stripped end into the wire opening,
and then tightening the screw. Recommended torque is 25 in-lbs.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-9
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Reinstalling Covers
1) After all AC input and equipment grounding connections have been made and
checked, reinstall the two AC Input Access Covers. Secure each by tightening
the captive fasteners.
Left Side AC Input Termination Panel
PCU 1
1
2
Shelf 1
PCU 2
1
2
PCU 3
1
2
PCU 1
1
2
Shelf 2
PCU 2
1
2
PCU 3
1
2
PCU 1
1
2
Shelf 3
PCU 2
1
2
PCU 3
1
2
PCU 1
1
2
Shelf 4
PCU 2
1
2
PCU 3
1
2
PCU 1
1
2
Shelf 5
PCU 2
1
2
PCU 1
1
2
Shelf 6
PCU 2
1
2
PCU 3
1
2
PCU 3
1
2
Right Side AC Input Termination Panel

PCU 4
1
2
Shelf 2
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 4
1
2
Shelf 1
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 6
1
2
PCU 6
1
2
PCU 4
1
2
Shelf 4
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 6
1
2
PCU 4
1
2
Shelf 3
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 6
1
2
PCU 4
1
2
Shelf 6
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 6
1
2
PCU 4
1
2
Shelf 5
PCU 5
1
2
PCU 6
1
2
Line to Line:
Connect Line 1 to Terminal 1.
Connect Line 2 to Terminal 2.

Line to Neutral:
Connect Line to Terminal 1.
Connect Neutral to Terminal 2.
Table 4-2
AC Input Connections to a 582126000 List 45 AC Input Termination Panel
Page 4-10
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
See
Detail A
See
Detail B
Rear
Rectifier (PCU) Shelves are Number
from #1 to #6 from Top to Bottom
Rectifiers (PCUs) are Numbered
from #1 to #6 from Left to Right
as Viewed from the Front of the System
GND
BAR
AC Cover
Removed
in Illustration
SHELF 2
PCU4
1
2
PCU5
1
2
SHELF 1
PCU6
1
2
PCU4
1
2
SHELF 4
PCU4
1
2
PCU5
1
2
PCU5
1
2
SHELF 1
PCU6
1
2
PCU1
1
2
SHELF 3
PCU6
1
2
PCU4
1
2
SHELF 6
PCU4
1
2
PCU5
1
2
PCU5
1
2
PCU4
1
2
Inside View
Detail A
PCU5
1
2
PCU2
1
2
SHELF 2
PCU3
1
2
PCU1
1
2
SHELF 3
PCU6
1
2
PCU1
1
2
SHELF 5
PCU6
1
2
GND
BAR
AC Cover
Removed
in Illustration
PCU1
1
2
PCU2
1
2
PCU3
1
2
SHELF 4
PCU2
1
2
PCU3
1
2
PCU1
1
2
SHELF 5
PCU6
1
2
PCU2
1
2
PCU2
1
2
PCU3
1
2
SHELF 6
PCU3
1
2
PCU1
1
2
PCU2
1
2
PCU3
1
2
Inside View
Detail B
Figure 4-3
AC Input and Equipment Grounding Connections to a 582126000 List 45 AC Input Termination Panel
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-11
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Connections to 588705000 List 3 (Three-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting
Shelves (when 582126000 List 46 AC Input Termination Panel is NOT
provided)
Spec. No. 588705000 List 3 Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf provides two 3-phase AC
input circuits. Each phase of each input circuit supplies one Rectifier Module. Circular
openings are provided in the side panels (side feed) and rear covers (rear feed) of the
Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf for AC input and AC input equipment grounding
conductors. The openings accept 3/4" inch conduit fittings. It is recommended that AC
input wiring be provided to all Rectifier Module mounting positions, including currently
unused positions. This wiring will ease future installation of Rectifier Modules to meet
increased load requirements.
Note: A grounding conductor must be provided with each AC input feed.
PROCEDURE
Refer to Figure 4-4 as these procedures are performed.
Note: Repeat the following procedures for each Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf in the
Power System.
Accessing Connections and Routing Wire
1) Remove the two AC Input Access Covers from the rear of the Rectifier Module
Mounting Shelf by first removing the screws that secure them.
2) Install conduit fittings in the side or rear openings as required. Plug buttons are
provided, and must be installed in the openings not being used.
3) Route wiring into the shelf through the previously installed conduit fittings.
Making AC Input Connections
Note: In each shelf, Rectifier Module mounting positions are number 1-6 from left to
right as viewed from the front.
1) Make AC input connections as shown in Figure 4-4. Connect each wire by
inserting the stripped end into the wire opening, and then tightening the screw.
Recommended torque is 18 in-lbs.
Making AC Equipment Grounding Connections
Note: Make equipment grounding connections to earth ground, not to the branch
circuit neutral conductor.
1) Connect AC input equipment grounding leads to the frame ground studs using
installer-provided ring lugs and factory-supplied mounting hardware.
Recommended torque is 23 in-lbs.
Page 4-12
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Reinstalling Covers
1) After all AC input and equipment grounding connections have been made and
checked, reinstall the two AC Input Access Covers on the back of the shelf.
Secure with the previously removed screws.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-13
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Hole for 3/4"
Conduit Fitting
(AC Input)
Rear
View
Hole for 3/4"
Conduit Fitting
(AC Input)
Rear View
AC IN
Feed 2
(Rectifier
Modules
4-6)
(ØA)
TB2
ØA 1
TB1
1 ØA
(ØA)
(ØB)
ØB 2
2 ØB
(ØB)
(ØC)
ØC 3
3 ØC
(ØC)
FRAME GROUND CONNECTIONS
One 10-32 X 3/4" stud
and hardware per side
AC IN
Feed 1
(Rectifier
Modules
1-3)
FRAME GROUND CONNECTIONS
One 10-32 X 3/4" stud
and hardware per side
CONNECTIONS WITHIN THE SHELF
Mounting
Position
NOTE
Rectifier Module mounting
positions are numbered left
to right as viewed from front
of shelf.
TB1, Terminal
1 (ØA)
2 (ØB)
Rect 1
L1
L2
Rect 2
L1
TB2, Terminal
1 (ØA)
2 (ØB)
Rect 4
L1
L2
Rect 5
L1
Rect 3
3 (ØC)
3 (ØC)
L2
L1
L2
Rect 6
L2
L1
L2
Figure 4-4
AC Input and Equipment Grounding Connections to a
588705000 List 3 (Three-Phase) Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
Page 4-14
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Connections to 582126000 List 46 (Three-Phase)
Top Mount AC Input Termination Panel
582126000 List 46 consists of a pre-wired, top-mount, AC input termination panel. The
panel provides two (2) three-phase input circuits for each of up to six (6) List 31 Rectifier
Module Mounting Shelves (12 three-phase feeds total per bay). Circular openings are
provided in the top of the panel for AC input and AC input grounding conductors. The
openings accept 3/4" inch conduit fittings. It is recommended that AC input wiring be
provided to all Rectifier Module mounting positions, including currently unused positions.
This wiring will ease future installation of Rectifier Modules to meet increased load
requirements.
Note: A grounding conductor must be provided with each AC input feed.
PROCEDURE
Refer to Figure 4-5 as these procedures are performed.
Note: Wiring to Rectifier Module Mounting Positions 1-3 in each shelf are made in the
left-hand side of the top access panel. Wiring to Rectifier Module Mounting
Positions 4-6 in each shelf are made in the right-hand side of the top access
panel, as viewed from the front of the system.
Accessing Connections and Routing Wire
1) Remove the two AC Input Access Covers from the AC Input Termination Panel
by first loosening the captive fastener that secures each of them.
2) Install conduit fittings as required in the top of the AC Input Termination Panel.
Plug buttons are provided, and must be installed in the openings not being used.
3) Route wiring into the AC Input Termination Panel through the previously installed
conduit fittings.
Making AC Input Connections
Note: In each rack, Rectifier Module shelves are numbered 1-6 from top to bottom.
In each shelf, Rectifier Module mounting positions are number 1-6 from left to
right as viewed from the front.
1) Make AC input connections as shown in Figure 4-5. Connect each wire by
inserting the stripped end into the wire opening, and then tightening the screw.
Recommended torque is 18 in-lbs.
Making AC Equipment Grounding Connections
Note: Make equipment grounding connections to earth ground, not to the branch
circuit neutral conductor.
1) Connect AC input equipment grounding leads to the GND BAR terminal blocks
provided. Connect each wire by inserting the stripped end into the wire opening,
and then tightening the screw. Recommended torque is 23 in-lbs.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-15
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Reinstalling Covers
1) After all AC input and equipment grounding connections have been made and
checked, reinstall the two AC Input Access Covers. Secure each by tightening
the captive fasteners.
Page 4-16
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Rear
Rectifier (PCU) Shelves are Number
from #1 to #6 from Top to Bottom
Cover
Removed
Cover
Removed
Rectifiers (PCUs) are numbered 1-6 from
left to right as viewed from the front.
GND
BAR
SHELF 3 PCU4-6
ØC
ØB
ØA
SHELF 6 PCU4-6
ØC
ØB
ØA
SHELF 2 PCU4-6
ØC
ØB
SHELF 1 PCU4-6
ØA
ØC
SHELF 5 PCU4-6
ØC
ØB
ØA
ØB
SHELF 1 PCU1-3
ØA
ØA
SHELF 4 PCU4-6
ØC
ØB
GND
BAR
ØA
ØB
SHELF 2 PCU1-3
ØC
ØA
SHELF 4 PCU1-3
ØA
ØB
ØC
ØB
SHELF 3 PCU1-3
ØC
ØA
SHELF 5 PCU1-3
ØA
ØB
ØC
ØB
ØC
SHELF 6 PCU1-3
ØA
ØB
ØC
Figure 4-5
AC Input and Equipment Grounding Connections to
582126000 List 46 (Three Phase) AC Input Termination Panel
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-17
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
EXTERNAL ALARM, REFERENCE,
AND CONTROL CONNECTIONS
Note: For recommended wire size and alarm relay contact ratings, refer to System
Application Guide SAG582126000. The SAG can be accessed from the CD
(Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
All external alarm, reference and control connections to the power system are made
within the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet.
Note: If List 80 LMS1000 Monitoring System is provided, refer to the separate LMS1000
Installation Manual for external alarm, reference and control connections to the
LMS1000.
If List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination Circuit Card is NOT Provided
Connect external alarm, reference, and control conductors to connector J8 on the MCA
Main Controller circuit card P/N 534868 and to terminal block TB1 on the
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532. Refer to Figure 4-6 for connector
location and identification, and Figures 4-7 and 4-8A through 4-8D for connector pinout
information. A pre-assembled cable is provided for connections to J8. One end connects
to J8, the other end contains stripped leads suitable for splicing to customer wiring. The
furnished cable is 15 ft. long. A 60 ft. long cable is available. Refer to SAG582126000
for cable part numbers.
Note: Remote Test/Equalize, Remote High Voltage Shutdown and Restart, and Rectifier
Module Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect connections can be
made to J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card or to TB1 located on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card.
If List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination Circuit Card IS Provided
List 71 provides an Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination circuit card (P/N 524734) inside the
Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. Make alarm connections to terminal blocks J1 through J4
on this circuit card. Refer to Figure 4-6 for connector location and identification, and
Figures 4-9A through 4-9D for connector pinout information. Also make external
reference and control connections to terminal block TB1 on the Interconnect/LVD Inhibit
circuit card P/N 509532 as described above.
To Access All External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections
1) Open the front door of the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding
the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
After Completing All External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections
1) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
Page 4-18
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
2) Close the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut
without turning the captive fastener.
JI
(Typical location on Modem or RS-485
crcuit card, Ethernet and RS-232/Modem
card slightly different configuration.)
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
J8
J4
J1
J2
J8
J9 J10
J1
J4
TB1
J13
J2
J3
ALARM TERMINATION/
AUDIBLE ALARM
CIRCUIT CARD, P/N 524734
(LIST 71 OPTION)
(MAIN BAY ONLY)
MCA MAIN CONTROLLER
CIRCUIT CARD, P/N 534868
(MAIN BAY ONLY)
INTERCONNECT/
LVD INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD,
P/N 509532
(ALL BAYS)
Figure 4-6
External Alarm, Reference, and Control Connector Location and Identification
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-19
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe or
TXM (Multiple Probe Concentrator Module) Connection (if required)
Procedure
1) If furnished, connect the Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation
Probe or TXM (multiple probe concentrator module) to connector J4 located on
the MCA Main Controller circuit card in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. Refer
to Figure 4-6 for location of J4.
2) If using a TXM module, complete the remaining electrical connections to the
module per Section 5940. Section 5940 can be found in the hardcopy Power
System Installation Manual, and on the CD (Electronic Documentation Package)
furnished with your system.
Connections to Terminal Block TB1 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit Circuit Card
P/N 509532
Terminal block TB1 is located inside the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532. Refer to Figure 4-6 for connector
location, and Figure 4-7 for connector pinouts.
TB1 provides spring-clamp type terminals for customer connections. To connect wire,
strip approximately 1/4 inch of insulation from the wire end. Fully insert the bare wire end
into the rectangular opening in the terminal block. Gently tug on the wire to ensure that it
cannot be pulled out of the terminal block. (Wire may be removed from the terminal block
by inserting a small flat-blade screwdriver into the square cavity directly behind the wire,
then depressing the screwdriver until the wire is released and can be pulled out of the
terminal block.)
Note: A P/N 509532 circuit card is located in each Distribution Cabinet. Unless
otherwise specified in these instructions, only make connections to TB1 on the
circuit card located in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet (the one connected to the
MCA).
Procedure
1) Remote Test/Equalize: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal
1 of TB1 places all Rectifier Modules into the test/equalize mode of operation.
Removal of the signal places all Rectifier Modules into the float mode of
operation.
Note: This connection can also be made to same terminal on any other
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card that may be connected to this circuit
card.
2) External System Voltage Meter Reading: If desired, extend external system
voltage meter reading leads from the voltage source to be read to terminals 2
(battery) and 3 (return) of TB1. This is the voltage source the MCA monitors for
system alarms and displays as "System Output Voltage".
Page 4-20
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Warning: Equipment damage may result if leads are connected to the
wrong terminals of TB1.
Note: Ensure the Internal/External System Voltage Meter Reading circuit card
on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 is in the EXT position,
as previously described in "Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options".
Note: System Voltage Meter Reading leads are factory connected to the
cabinet's output busbars when Internal/External Voltage System Voltage
Meter Reading circuit card located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card
P/N 509532 is in the INT position, as previously described in "Chapter 3.
Setting Wiring Options".
Note: This connection cannot be made to same terminals on any other
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card that may be connected to this circuit
card.
3) External Voltage Sensing: If desired, extend external voltage sensing leads
from the battery or other voltage sense location to terminals 4 (positive) and 5
(negative) of TB1. The external voltage sensing leads should be fused at 1-1/3
amperes.
Warning: Equipment damage may result if leads are connected to the
wrong terminals of TB1.
Note: Ensure the Internal/External Voltage Sensing circuit card located on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 is in the EXT position, as
previously described in "Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options".
Note: External voltage sensing lead connections must be made to the SYSTEM
side of any battery protective or disconnect devices present.
Note: Sense leads are factory connected to the cabinet's output busbars when
Internal/External Voltage Sensing circuit card located on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 is in the INT position, as
previously described in "Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options".
Note: This connection cannot be made to same terminals on any other
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card that may be connected to this circuit
card.
4) Internally Fused Voltage Source for Connection to an LMS1000 Monitoring
System: Terminal 7 of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
is internally connected to 5 ampere fuse F7 located on the same circuit card.
This fuse is connected to system output. If desired, connect the input of an
LMS1000 to this terminal. Terminal 6 of TB1 on the same circuit card is provided
for the return connection.
Note: If List 80 is provided, leads from the List 80 LMS1000 are factoryconnected to these terminals (Main Bay only).
5) Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect: Customer furnished
system ground applied to terminal 10 of TB1 inhibits all Rectifier Modules.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-21
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and is also to be controlled by the
emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect switch, connect an external
Form-C Emergency Stop switch to TB1 as follows: Connect the normally close
contacts between TB1-8 and TB1-9. Connect the normally open contacts
between TB1-9 and TB1-10. Activating the switch inhibits all Rectifier Modules,
and disconnects the battery and system output from the controlled load(s).
Note: If low voltage disconnect is furnished and an emergency stop switch is not
required, for proper low voltage disconnect operation, jumper TB1-8 to
TB1-9.
Note: Remove any jumpers from TB1-8, 9, and 10 on all other Interconnect/LVD
Inhibit circuit cards that may be connected to this circuit card.
Note: This connection can also be made to same terminals on any other
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card that may be connected to this circuit
card.
6) System Fuse Alarm Input: The system fuse alarm circuit activates when a ±18
to 60 volts DC signal is applied to terminal 11 of TB1.
Note: This connection can also be made to same terminal on any other
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card that may be connected to this circuit
card.
7) Terminal 12 is not used.
Page 4-22
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
J8
J9
J10
J3
-48V
J1
J7
INT.
INTERCONNECT/LVD INHIBIT
CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509532
J2
J4
J5 J6
+24V
EXT.
J12
TB1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
+SNS
V OUT
RETURN
-SNS
V OUT
RETURN
EXTERNAL
SYSTEM
VOLTAGE
METER
READING
EXTERNAL INTERNALLY
FUSED
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
SENSING
SOURCE
EMERGENCY
SHUTDOWN
AND
FIRE ALARM
DISCONNECT
REMOTE
TEST/EQ
SYSTEM
FUSE
ALARM
INPUT
Figure 4-7
External Reference and Control Connections to TB1
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-23
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Connections to J8 on MCA Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868
(if List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination Circuit Card is NOT Provided)
Connector J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card is a subminiature D-type
connector. Refer to Figure 4-6 for connector location, and Figures 4-8A through 4-8D for
connector pinouts.
A 15' color-coded pre-assembled cable is furnished (an optional 60 ft. cable is also
available). Refer to SAG582126000 for cable part numbers. This cable connects to J8
on the MCA Main Controller circuit card and provides leads that can be spliced to
customer leads. Splice these leads as described below. The color scheme for this cable
is shown in Figures 4-8A through 4-8D. This wire harness cannot be used when List 71
Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination circuit card is connected to J8 on the MCA Main
Controller circuit card.
MCA External Alarm Relay Contacts: The MCA provides 9 Form-C alarm relay
contacts (available at J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card or J1-J4 on the optional
List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination circuit card). The configuration of these alarm
relays is determined by the MCA Configuration Number set in your system. You can
determine the MCA Configuration Number by the List Number of the MCA (located on the
Power System’s nameplate). You can also view your system's MCA Configuration
Number after power-up by following the MCA Menu Tree (Section 6022) (MCA Menu
Tree Line Item "SPECNO#########" in the 'Inventory Menu').
Note: Do not apply voltages higher than 42.4 volts AC (peak) or 60 volts DC to the MCA
external alarm relay terminals.
If Equipped with List 10 MCA (Configuration Number 534876)
Refer to Figure 4-8A.
1) Remote High Voltage Shutdown and Restart: Customer furnished system
ground applied to terminal 8 of J8 activates the internal high voltage shutdown
and restart circuit on all Rectifier Modules.
2) Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect: Customer furnished
system ground applied to terminal 9 of J8 (or terminal 10 of TB1 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) inhibits all Rectifier Modules.
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and is also to be controlled by the
emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect switch, use the terminals of TB1
on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 as previously described.
3) Remote Test/Equalize: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal
10 of J8 (or terminal 1 of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N
509532) places all Rectifier Modules into the test/equalize mode of operation.
Removal of the signal places all Rectifier Modules into the float mode of
operation.
4) Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 30 and 31 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 29 and 30 of J8.
Page 4-24
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
5) Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 12 and 13 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 11 and 12 of J8.
6) High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition, a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 26 and 27 of J8, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 27 and 28 of J8.
7) High Voltage Alarm 2 (Relay K4): During an alarm condition, a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 14 and 15 of J8, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 15 and 16 of J8.
8) Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition, a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 23 and 24 of J8, and an open loop
circuit is provided between terminals 24 and 25 of J8.
9) 50% Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition, a
closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 17 and 18 of J8, and an open
loop circuit is provided between terminals 18 and 19 of J8.
10) AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 21 and 22 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 20 and 21 of J8.
11) MCA Audible Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition, a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 32 and 33 of J8, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 33 and 34 of J8.
12) Test/Equalize (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the test/equalize mode
(locally or remotely), a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 35 and
36 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 36 and 37 of J8.
13) System Ground: System ground is supplied at terminal 4 of J8 for connection
into customer's alarm circuits, if required.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-25
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Alarm
or
Control
J8
Pin
Mating
Harness
Wire Colors 5
Test/
Equalize
(Relay K9) 2
37
36
Blue/Black
Violet/Black
35
Slate/Green
MCA Audible
Alarm
(Relay K8) 3
34
33
32
31
Major Alarm
(Relay K1) 3
High Voltage
Alarm 1
(Relay K3) 2
Battery On
Discharge
Alarm
(Relay K5) 2
AC Fail
Alarm
(Relay K7) 2
J8
ON
MCA
Mating
Harness
Wire Colors 5
Violet/White
Blue/White
Green/White
J8
Pin
Alarm
or
Control
19
18
17
50% Battery
On Discharge Alarm
(Relay K6) 2
Orange/White
16
Slate/Red
Lt. Blue/Green
Lt. Blue/Blue
Lt. Blue/Red
Red/White
Brown/White
Black/White
Lt. Green
15
14
13
12
High Voltage
Alarm 2
(Relay K4) 2
30
Lt. Blue/Black
Pink
11
29
Lt. Blue
White
28
Pink/Green
Slate
27
26
25
24
Pink/Blue
Pink/Red
Pink/Black
Slate/Black
Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow
10 Remote Test/Equalize 4
Rectifier Module
9
Emergency Shutdown 4
8 Remote HVSD
7 (Not Used)
6 (Not Used)
5 (Not Used)
23
Green/Black
Orange
4
System Ground
22
21
20
Yellow/Black
Orange/Black
Red/Black
Red
Brown
Black
3
2
1
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
37
20
19
1
Minor Alarm
(Relay K2) 2
1
20
RELAY CONTACT LEGEND
19
37
FRONT VIEW OF PLUG ON MATING HARNESS
Notes:
1. “Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are
shown de-energized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These connections can be made at J8 or at TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
located within the Distribution Assembly.
5. Mating Harness Wire Colors apply to standard wire harness P/N 514327 (15 ft.) or accessory wire
harness P/N 514380 (60 ft.).
Caution: All wires in the mating wire harness may be connected within the cabinet. Shorting or
grounding of unused wires may result in service interruption or equipment damage.
Therefore, insulate all wire ends not being used in your application.
Figure 4-8A
External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections to J8 on MCA
Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 when Power System is Equipped with
LIST 10 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534876) (if no List 71)
Page 4-26
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
If Equipped with List 11 MCA (Configuration Number 534877)
Refer to Figure 4-8B.
1) Remote High Voltage Shutdown and Restart: Customer furnished system
ground applied to terminal 8 of J8 activates the internal high voltage shutdown
and restart circuit on all Rectifier Modules.
2) Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect: Customer furnished
system ground applied to terminal 9 of J8 (or terminal 10 of TB1 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) inhibits all Rectifier Modules.
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and is also to be controlled by the
emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect switch, use the terminals of TB1
on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 as previously described.
3) Remote Test/Equalize: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal
10 of J8 (or terminal 1 of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N
509532) places all Rectifier Modules into the test/equalize mode of operation.
Removal of the signal places all Rectifier Modules into the float mode of
operation.
4) Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 30 and 31 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 29 and 30 of J8.
5) Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 12 and 13 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 11 and 12 of J8.
6) High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition, a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 26 and 27 of J8, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 27 and 28 of J8.
7) Rectifier Module Fail Major Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition, a
closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 14 and 15 of J8, and an open
loop circuit is provided between terminals 15 and 16 of J8.
8) Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition, a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 23 and 24 of J8, and an open loop
circuit is provided between terminals 24 and 25 of J8.
9) Rectifier Module Fail Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition, a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 17 and 18 of J8, and an open loop
circuit is provided between terminals 18 and 19 of J8.
10) AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 21 and 22 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 20 and 21 of J8.
11) MCA Audible Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition, a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 32 and 33 of J8, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 33 and 34 of J8.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-27
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
12) Fuse/Circuit Breaker Alarm (Relay K9): During an alarm condition, a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 35 and 36 of J8, and an open loop
circuit is provided between terminals 36 and 37 of J8.
13) System Ground: System ground is supplied at terminal 4 of J8 for connection
into customer's alarm circuits, if required.
Page 4-28
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Alarm
or
Control
J8
Pin
Mating
Harness
Wire Colors 5
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker Alarm
(Relay K9) 2
37
36
Blue/Black
Violet/Black
35
Slate/Green
MCA Audible
Alarm
(Relay K8) 3
34
33
32
31
Major Alarm
(Relay K1) 3
High Voltage
Alarm 1
(Relay K3) 2
Battery On
Discharge
Alarm
(Relay K5) 2
AC Fail
Alarm
(Relay K7) 2
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
J8
ON
MCA
Mating
Harness
Wire Colors 5
Violet/White
Blue/White
Green/White
J8
Pin
Alarm
or
Control
19
18
17
Rectifier Module
Fail Alarm
(Relay K6) 2
Orange/White
16
Slate/Red
Lt. Blue/Green
Lt. Blue/Blue
Lt. Blue/Red
Red/White
Brown/White
Black/White
Lt. Green
15
14
13
12
Rectifier Module
Fail Major Alarm
(Relay K4) 2
30
Lt. Blue/Black
Pink
11
29
Lt. Blue
White
28
Pink/Green
Slate
27
26
25
24
Pink/Blue
Pink/Red
Pink/Black
Slate/Black
Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow
10 Remote Test/Equalize 4
Rectifier Module
9
Emergency Shutdown 4
8 Remote HVSD
7 (Not Used)
6 (Not Used)
5 (Not Used)
23
Green/Black
Orange
4
System Ground
22
21
20
Yellow/Black
Orange/Black
Red/Black
Red
Brown
Black
3
2
1
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
37
20
19
1
Minor Alarm
(Relay K2) 2
1
20
RELAY CONTACT LEGEND
19
37
FRONT VIEW OF PLUG ON MATING HARNESS
Notes:
1. “Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are
shown de-energized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These connections can be made at J8 or at TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
located within the Distribution Assembly.
5. Mating Harness Wire Colors apply to standard wire harness P/N 514327 (15 ft.) or accessory wire
harness P/N 514380 (60 ft.).
Caution: All wires in the mating wire harness may be connected within the cabinet. Shorting or
grounding of unused wires may result in service interruption or equipment damage.
Therefore, insulate all wire ends not being used in your application.
Figure 4-8B
External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections to J8 on MCA
Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 when Power System is Equipped with
LIST 11 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534877) (if no List 71)
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-29
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
If Equipped with List 12 MCA (Configuration Number 534878)
Refer to Figure 4-8C.
1) Remote High Voltage Shutdown and Restart: Customer furnished system
ground applied to terminal 8 of J8 activates the internal high voltage shutdown
and restart circuit on all Rectifier Modules.
2) Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect: Customer furnished
system ground applied to terminal 9 of J8 (or terminal 10 of TB1 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) inhibits all Rectifier Modules.
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and is also to be controlled by the
emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect switch, use the terminals of TB1
on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 as previously described.
3) Remote Test/Equalize: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal
10 of J8 (or terminal 1 of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N
509532) places all Rectifier Modules into the test/equalize mode of operation.
Removal of the signal places all Rectifier Modules into the float mode of
operation.
4) Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 30 and 31 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 29 and 30 of J8.
5) Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 11 and 12 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 12 and 13 of J8.
6) High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition, a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 27 and 28 of J8, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 26 and 27 of J8.
7) MCA Fail Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 15 and 16 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 14 and 15 of J8.
8) Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition, a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 24 and 25 of J8, and an open loop
circuit is provided between terminals 23 and 24 of J8.
9) Very Low Voltage Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition, a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 18 and 19 of J8, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 17 and 18 of J8.
10) AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 20 and 21 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 21 and 22 of J8.
11) Fuse Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 32 and 33 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 33 and 34 of J8.
Page 4-30
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
12) Rectifier Module Fail Alarm (Relay K9): During an alarm condition, a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 36 and 37 of J8, and an open loop
circuit is provided between terminals 35 and 36 of J8.
13) System Ground: System ground is supplied at terminal 4 of J8 for connection
into customer's alarm circuits, if required.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-31
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Alarm
or
Control
Rectifier Module
Fail Alarm
(Relay K9) 3
Fuse Alarm
(Relay K8) 3
Major Alarm
(Relay K1) 3
High Voltage
Alarm 1
(Relay K3) 3
Battery On
Discharge
Alarm
(Relay K5) 3
AC Fail
Alarm
(Relay K7) 3
J8
Pin
Mating
Harness
Wire Colors 5
37
36
Blue/Black
Violet/Black
35
Slate/Green
34
33
32
31
J8
ON
MCA
37
19
Mating
Harness
Wire Colors 5
Violet/White
Blue/White
Green/White
J8
Pin
Alarm
or
Control
19
18
17
Very Low
Voltage Alarm
(Relay K6) 3
Orange/White
16
Slate/Red
Lt. Blue/Green
Lt. Blue/Blue
Lt. Blue/Red
Red/White
Brown/White
Black/White
Lt. Green
15
14
13
12
30
Lt. Blue/Black
Pink
11
29
Lt. Blue
White
28
Pink/Green
Slate
27
26
25
24
Pink/Blue
Pink/Red
Pink/Black
Slate/Black
Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow
10 Remote Test/Equalize 4
Rectifier Module
9
Emergency Shutdown 4
8 Remote HVSD
7 (Not Used)
6 (Not Used)
5 (Not Used)
23
Green/Black
Orange
4
System Ground
22
21
20
Yellow/Black
Orange/Black
Red/Black
Red
Brown
Black
3
2
1
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
20
1
MCA Fail Alarm
(Relay K4) 3
Minor Alarm
(Relay K2) 3
1
20
RELAY CONTACT LEGEND
19
37
FRONT VIEW OF PLUG ON MATING HARNESS
Notes:
1. “Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are
shown de-energized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These connections can be made at J8 or at TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
located within the Distribution Assembly.
5. Mating Harness Wire Colors apply to standard wire harness P/N 514327 (15 ft.) or accessory wire
harness P/N 514380 (60 ft.).
Caution: All wires in the mating wire harness may be connected within the cabinet. Shorting or
grounding of unused wires may result in service interruption or equipment damage.
Therefore, insulate all wire ends not being used in your application.
Figure 4-8C
External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections to J8 on MCA
Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 when Power System is Equipped with
LIST 12 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534878) (if no List 71)
Page 4-32
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
If Equipped with List 13 MCA (Configuration Number 534879)
Refer to Figure 4-8D.
1) Remote High Voltage Shutdown and Restart: Customer furnished system
ground applied to terminal 8 of J8 activates the internal high voltage shutdown
and restart circuit on all Rectifier Modules.
2) Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect: Customer furnished
system ground applied to terminal 9 of J8 (or terminal 10 of TB1 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532) inhibits all Rectifier Modules.
If low voltage disconnect is furnished and is also to be controlled by the
emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect switch, use the terminals of TB1
on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 as previously described.
3) Remote Test/Equalize: Customer furnished system ground applied to terminal
10 of J8 (or terminal 1 of TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N
509532) places all Rectifier Modules into the test/equalize mode of operation.
Removal of the signal places all Rectifier Modules into the float mode of
operation.
4) Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 30 and 31 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 29 and 30 of J8.
5) Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 12 and 13 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 11 and 12 of J8.
6) Test/Equalize Mode 2 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition, a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 26 and 27 of J8, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 27 and 28 of J8.
7) Fuse/Circuit Breaker Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition, a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 14 and 15 of J8, and an open loop
circuit is provided between terminals 15 and 16 of J8.
8) Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition, a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 23 and 24 of J8, and an open loop
circuit is provided between terminals 24 and 25 of J8.
9) AC Fail Major Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition, a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 17 and 18 of J8, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 18 and 19 of J8.
10) AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 21 and 22 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 20 and 21 of J8.
11) LVD Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 32 and 33 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 33 and 34 of J8.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-33
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
12) Test/Equalize Mode 1 (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the
test/equalize mode (locally or remotely), a closed loop circuit is provided between
terminals 35 and 36 of J8, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals
36 and 37 of J8.
13) System Ground: System ground is supplied at terminal 4 of J8 for connection
into customer's alarm circuits, if required.
Page 4-34
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Alarm
or
Control
Test/Equalize
Mode 1
(Relay K9) 2
LVD Alarm
(Relay K8) 3
Major Alarm
(Relay K1) 3
Test/Equalize
Mode 2
(Relay K3) 2
Battery On
Discharge
Alarm
(Relay K5) 2
AC Fail
Alarm
(Relay K7) 2
J8
Pin
Mating
Harness
Wire Colors 5
37
36
Blue/Black
Violet/Black
35
Slate/Green
34
33
32
31
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
J8
ON
MCA
Mating
Harness
Wire Colors 5
Violet/White
Blue/White
Green/White
J8
Pin
Alarm
or
Control
19
18
17
AC Fail
Major Alarm
(Relay K6) 2
Orange/White
16
Slate/Red
Lt. Blue/Green
Lt. Blue/Blue
Lt. Blue/Red
Red/White
Brown/White
Black/White
Lt. Green
15
14
13
12
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker Alarm
(Relay K4) 2
30
Lt. Blue/Black
Pink
11
29
Lt. Blue
White
28
Pink/Green
Slate
27
26
25
24
Pink/Blue
Pink/Red
Pink/Black
Slate/Black
Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow
10 Remote Test/Equalize 4
Rectifier Module
9
Emergency Shutdown 4
8 Remote HVSD
7 (Not Used)
6 (Not Used)
5 (Not Used)
23
Green/Black
Orange
4
System Ground
22
21
20
Yellow/Black
Orange/Black
Red/Black
Red
Brown
Black
3
2
1
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
37
20
19
1
Minor Alarm
(Relay K2) 2
1
20
RELAY CONTACT LEGEND
19
37
FRONT VIEW OF PLUG ON MATING HARNESS
Notes:
1. “Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are
shown de-energized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These connections can be made at J8 or at TB1 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
located within the Distribution Assembly.
5. Mating Harness Wire Colors apply to standard wire harness P/N 514327 (15 ft.) or accessory wire
harness P/N 514380 (60 ft.).
Caution: All wires in the mating wire harness may be connected within the cabinet. Shorting or
grounding of unused wires may result in service interruption or equipment damage.
Therefore, insulate all wire ends not being used in your application.
Figure 4-8D
External Alarm, Reference and Control Connections to J8 on MCA
Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 534868 when Power System is Equipped with
LIST 13 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534879) (if no List 71)
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-35
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Connections to Terminal Blocks J1-J4 on Audible
Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card P/N 524734
(List 71 only)
Terminal blocks J1-J4 on the Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination circuit card provide
spring-clamp type terminals for customer connections. Refer to Figure 4-6 for terminal
block location, and Figure 4-9 for connector pinouts.
To Make Wiring Connection: To connect wire, strip approximately 1/4 inch of insulation
from the wire end. Fully insert the bare wire end into the rectangular opening in the
terminal block. Gently tug on the wire to ensure that it cannot be pulled out of the
terminal block. (Wire may be removed from the terminal block by inserting a small flatblade screwdriver into the square cavity directly behind the wire, then depressing the
screwdriver until the wire is released and can be pulled out of the terminal block.)
MCA External Alarm Relay Contacts: The MCA provides 9 Form-C alarm relay
contacts (available at J8 on the MCA Main Controller circuit card or J1-J4 on the optional
List 71 Audible Alarm/Alarm Termination circuit card). The configuration of these alarm
relays is determined by the MCA Configuration Number set in your system. You can
determine the MCA Configuration Number by the List Number of the MCA (located on the
Power System’s nameplate). You can also view your system's MCA Configuration
Number after power-up by following the MCA Menu Tree (Section 6022) (MCA Menu
Tree Line Item "SPECNO#########" in the 'Inventory Menu').
Note: Do not apply voltages higher than 42.4 volts AC (peak) or 60 volts DC to the
external alarm relay terminals.
Page 4-36
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
If Equipped with List 10 MCA (Configuration Number 534876)
Refer to Figure 4-9A.
1) Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 9 and 10 of J1.
2) Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J3, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 8 and 9 of J3.
3) High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J2, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J2.
4) High Voltage Alarm 2 (Relay K4): During an alarm condition a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J3, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J3.
5) Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J2, and an open loop circuit
is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J2.
6) 50% Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition a
closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J3, and an open loop
circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J3.
7) AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J2, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 8 and 9 of J2.
8) MCA Audible Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit
is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 6 and 7 of J1.
Note: External audible alarm connections are inoperative if Local/Remote
option jumpers on the List 71 circuit card are set for Local alarm
operation. See "Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options” for an adjustment
procedure.
9) Test/Equalize (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the test/equalize mode
(locally or remotely) a closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4
of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J1.
10) Converter Minor Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J4, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 1 and 2 of J4.
11) Converter Major Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J4, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 4 and 5 of J4.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-37
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
J4
1
J3
J5
10
1
524734
10
J8
J1
1
Alarm
10
Term.
(Not Used)
Test/
Equalize
(Relay K9) 2
J10 J11
1
Of
1
2
3
5
6
Alarm
Term.
50% Battery
On Discharge Alarm
(Relay K6) 2
J1
7
8
9
Major Alarm
(Relay K1) 3
10
(Not Used)
4
MCA Audible Alarm
(Relay K8) 3
J2
High Voltage
Alarm 2
(Relay K4) 2
Minor Alarm
(Relay K2) 2
10
(Not Used)
High Voltage
Alarm 1
(Relay K3) 2
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
(Relay K5) 2
AC Fail
Alarm
(Relay K7) 2
Converter Minor
Alarm 2, 4
3
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
Of
1
2
3
J2
Converter Major
Alarm 2, 4
7
8
9
4
5
6
(Not Used)
10
J4
7
8
9
10
Notes:
1. “Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are
shown de-energized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These relays on Alarm Termination/Audible Alarm circuit card. All other relays on MCA.
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Figure 4-9A
External Alarm Connections to LIST 71 Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card
when Power System is Equipped with LIST 10 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534876)
Page 4-38
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
If Equipped with List 11 MCA (Configuration Number 534877)
Refer to Figure 4-9B.
1) Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 9 and 10 of J1.
2) Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J3, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 8 and 9 of J3.
3) High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J2, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J2.
4) Rectifier Module Fail Major Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition a
closed loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J3, and an open loop
circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J3.
5) Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J2, and an open loop circuit
is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J2.
6) Rectifier Module Fail Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J3, and an open loop circuit
is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J3.
7) AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J2, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 8 and 9 of J2.
8) MCA Audible Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit
is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 6 and 7 of J1.
Note: External audible alarm connections are inoperative if Local/Remote
option jumpers on the List 71 circuit card are set for Local alarm
operation. See "Chapter 3. Setting Wiring Options” for an adjustment
procedure.
9) Fuse/Circuit Breaker Alarm (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the
test/equalize mode (locally or remotely) a closed loop circuit is provided between
terminals 3 and 4 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2
and 3 of J1.
10) Converter Minor Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J4, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 1 and 2 of J4.
11) Converter Major Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J4, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 4 and 5 of J4.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-39
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
J4
1
J3
J5
10
1
524734
10
J8
J1
1
Alarm
10
Term.
(Not Used)
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker Alarm
(Relay K9) 2
J10 J11
1
Of
1
2
3
5
6
Alarm
Term.
Rectifier Module
Fail Alarm
(Relay K6) 2
J1
7
8
9
Major Alarm
(Relay K1) 3
10
(Not Used)
4
MCA Audible Alarm
(Relay K8) 3
J2
Rectifier Module
Fail Major Alarm
(Relay K4) 2
Minor Alarm
(Relay K2) 2
10
(Not Used)
High Voltage
Alarm 1
(Relay K3) 2
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
(Relay K5) 2
AC Fail
Alarm
(Relay K7) 2
Converter Minor
Alarm 2, 4
3
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
Of
1
2
3
J2
Converter Major
Alarm 2, 4
7
8
9
4
5
6
(Not Used)
10
J4
7
8
9
10
Notes:
1. “Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are
shown de-energized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These relays on Alarm Termination/Audible Alarm circuit card. All other relays on MCA.
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Figure 4-9B
External Alarm Connections to LIST 71 Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card
when Power System is Equipped with LIST 11 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534877)
Page 4-40
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
If Equipped with List 12 MCA (Configuration Number 534878)
Refer to Figure 4-9C.
1) Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 9 and 10 of J1.
2) Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J3, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 9 and 10 of J3.
3) High Voltage Alarm 1 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J2, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J2.
4) MCA Fail Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J3, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 6 and 7 of J3.
5) Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J2, and an open loop circuit
is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J2.
6) Very Low Voltage Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J3, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J3.
7) AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J2, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 9 and 10 of J2.
8) Fuse Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 6 and 7 of J1.
9) Rectifier Module Fail Alarm (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the
test/equalize mode (locally or remotely) a closed loop circuit is provided between
terminals 2 and 3 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 3
and 4 of J1.
10) Converter Minor Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J4, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 1 and 2 of J4.
11) Converter Major Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J4, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 4 and 5 of J4.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-41
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
J4
1
J3
J5
10
1
524734
10
J8
J1
1
Alarm
10
Term.
(Not Used)
Rectifier Module
Fail Alarm
(Relay K9) 3
J10 J11
1
Of
1
2
3
5
6
10
Alarm
Term.
(Not Used)
Very Low
Voltage Alarm
(Relay K6) 3
4
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker Alarm
(Relay K8) 3
J2
J1
MCA Fail Alarm
(Relay K4) 3
7
Minor Alarm
(Relay K2) 3
10
(Not Used)
High Voltage
Alarm 1
(Relay K3) 3
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
(Relay K5) 3
AC Fail
Alarm
(Relay K7) 3
Converter Minor
Alarm 2, 4
3
6
4
5
6
J3
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
1
2
3
7
8
9
Major Alarm
(Relay K1) 3
Of
1
2
3
J2
Converter Major
Alarm 2, 4
7
8
9
4
5
6
(Not Used)
10
J4
7
8
9
10
Notes:
1. “Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are
shown de-energized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These relays on Alarm Termination/Audible Alarm circuit card. All other relays on MCA.
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Figure 4-9C
External Alarm Connections to LIST 71 Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card
when Power System is Equipped with LIST 12 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534878)
Page 4-42
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
If Equipped with List 13 MCA (Configuration Number 534879)
Refer to Figure 4-9D.
1) Major Alarm (Relay K1): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 8 and 9 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 9 and 10 of J1.
2) Minor Alarm (Relay K2): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J3, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 8 and 9 of J3.
3) Test/Equalize Mode 2 (Relay K3): During an alarm condition a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J2, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J2.
4) Fuse/Circuit Breaker Alarm (Relay K4): During an alarm condition a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J3, and an open loop circuit
is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J3.
5) Battery On Discharge Alarm (Relay K5): During an alarm condition a closed
loop circuit is provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J2, and an open loop circuit
is provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J2.
6) AC Fail Major Alarm (Relay K6): During an alarm condition a closed loop
circuit is provided between terminals 3 and 4 of J3, and an open loop circuit is
provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J3.
7) AC Fail Alarm (Relay K7): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 9 and 10 of J2, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 8 and 9 of J2.
8) LVD Alarm (Relay K8): During an alarm condition a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 6 and 7 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 5 and 6 of J1.
9) Test/Equalize Mode 1 (Relay K9): When the system is placed in the
test/equalize mode (locally or remotely) a closed loop circuit is provided between
terminals 3 and 4 of J1, and an open loop circuit is provided between terminals 2
and 3 of J1.
10) Converter Minor Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 2 and 3 of J4, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 1 and 2 of J4.
11) Converter Major Alarm: During an alarm condition, a closed loop circuit is
provided between terminals 5 and 6 of J4, and an open loop circuit is provided
between terminals 4 and 5 of J4.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-43
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
J4
1
J3
J5
10
1
524734
10
J8
J1
1
Alarm
10
Term.
(Not Used)
Test/Equalize
Mode 1
(Relay K9) 2
J10 J11
1
Of
1
2
3
5
6
Alarm
Term.
AC Fail
Major Alarm
(Relay K6) 2
J1
7
8
9
Major Alarm
(Relay K1) 3
10
(Not Used)
4
LVD Alarm
(Relay K8) 3
J2
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker Alarm
(Relay K4) 2
Minor Alarm
(Relay K2) 2
10
(Not Used)
Test/Equalize
Mode 2
(Relay K3) 2
Battery On
Discharge Alarm
(Relay K5) 2
AC Fail
Alarm
(Relay K7) 2
Converter Minor
Alarm 2, 4
3
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
Of
1
2
3
J2
Converter Major
Alarm 2, 4
7
8
9
4
5
6
(Not Used)
10
J4
7
8
9
10
Notes:
1. “Normally open” and “normally closed” refer to contact state with relay de-energized. All relays are
shown de-energized. See Notes 2 and 3 for relay state during alarm condition.
2. These relays are de-energized during normal operation, and energized during an alarm condition.
3. These relays are energized during normal operation, and de-energized during an alarm condition.
4. These relays on Alarm Termination/Audible Alarm circuit card. All other relays on MCA.
Normally Open
Common
Normally Closed
Figure 4-9D
External Alarm Connections to LIST 71 Audible Alarm / Alarm Termination Circuit Card
when Power System is Equipped with LIST 13 MCA (Configuration Spec. No. 534879)
Page 4-44
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Battery Disconnect External Alarm Connections
to List RB, RC, RD, or RE (if furnished)
When the power system is equipped with List RB, RC, RD, or RE; one set of Form-C
contacts is provided to control a customer-furnished external alarm. The contacts are
rated for 5A at 28VDC. Connections are made via a 3-pin locking-type connector (P2)
located within the Distribution Cabinet (top left corner directly in front of the battery
disconnect unit). A 10-ft. long mating wire harness suitable for splicing to customer alarm
circuits is furnished. Refer to Figure 4-10 for the color code.
Alarm contacts operate as follows. When the contactor is energized (pulled in), contacts
open between pins 1 and 2 of connector P2, and contacts close between pins 2 and 3 of
P2. When the contactor is deenergized (released), contacts close between pins 1 and 2
of connector P2, and contacts open between pins 2 and 3 of P2.
ALARM CONTACTS
Contactor shown
in deenergized
(released) state.
CONNECTOR P2
(NEAR SWITCH)
BLUE
VIOLET
SLATE
1
1
BLUE
2
2
VIOLET
3
3
SLATE
FURNISHED 10 FT. HARNESS
Figure 4-10
Battery Disconnect Alarm Connections
(List RB, RC, RD, RE)
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-45
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Load Shunt Connections (Shunted GJ/218 Circuit Breakers and/or
List AJ and CJ Distribution Bus Panels) (if furnished)
The Power System may include distribution options that provide individual load metering
shunts. These include GJ/218 circuit breakers that are equipped with shunts, and List AJ
and CJ Distribution Bus Panels which also provide shunts. In all cases, the shunt leads
are labeled for identification. The labels indicate the bay (BAY 1 or BAY 2) and the
mounting order of the GJ circuit breakers and/or TPH fuse holders in the Distribution
Cabinet. Refer to Figures 4-11A and 4-11B for examples. Note that numbering is from
left to right or bottom to top in each row, and starts with the bottom row in the cabinet.
Unoccupied mounting positions are not counted. GJ/218 circuit breakers NOT equipped
with shunts also are not counted. The leads are color-coded: red for positive (+) and
black for negative (-).
Unless otherwise specified, the shunt leads exit the Distribution Cabinet at the rear of the
bottom panel. Lead length from this exit point ranges from approximately 7 to 10 feet.
The leads are 22 AWG stranded wire in twisted pairs. Refer to System Application Guide
SAG582126000 for shunt ratings.
Connecting Shunt Leads to the LMS1000 Monitoring System (List 80)
If the Power System is equipped with the LMS1000 Monitoring System (List 80), shunt
leads in the Main Bay are factory-connected to one or more Four (4) Input or Eight (8)
Input Analog Circuit Cards in the LMS1000. The leads are connected as shown in
Figures 4-11C or 4-11D. If Supplemental Bays are provided, the installer must connect
the Supplemental Bay shunt leads to additional Analog Circuit Cards in the LMS1000 as
required. Follow the pattern shown in Figures 4-11C or 4-11D when making these
connections. Refer to the separate LMS1000 documentation for complete installation
and configuration details.
Note: The shunts used in the shunted GJ/218-type circuit breakers provide 25mV at full
rated load. To correctly read these shunts, the LMS1000 must be programmed as
follows: If using four-input analog cards (P/N 506336), set jumper J2, J102, J202,
and J302 on each card to read 50mV and 100mV DC shunt inputs. (If using the
eight (8) input analog circuit card, P/N 514528, this adjustment is not required.)
Then program the LMS1000 to read a 50mV shunt at TWICE the actual full load
rating of the shunt. For example, for a 100-amp circuit breaker with 25 mV shunt,
set the LMS1000 to read 50 mV at 200 amperes. Refer to the separate LMS1000
documentation for complete installation and configuration details.
Page 4-46
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
ROW D
(LOAD D)
FEED
LOAD D
LOAD C
LIST
CF
9
10 11
12
13
14 15
16
ROW C
(LOAD C)
FEED
ROW B
(LOAD B)
FEED
LOAD B
LOAD A
LIST
CE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ROW A
(LOAD A)
FEED
PARTIAL FRONT VIEW OF
4-ROW CABINET IN
MAIN BAY
(ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE EQUIPPED WITH SHUNTS)
EXAMPLE: SHUNT LEADS FROM THIS
CIRCUIT BREAKER ARE LABELED "BAY 1 #4".
Figure 4-11A
Distribution Option Example Showing Circuit Breaker Shunt Lead Numbering Scheme
(Numbers shown on circuit breakers do not appear on actual device.)
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-47
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
EXAMPLE: SHUNT LEADS FROM THIS CIRCUIT BREAKER
ARE LABELED "BAY 2 #8".
ROW D
(LOAD D)
FEED
LIST
CD
LOAD
D
8
7
6
ROW C
(LOAD C)
FEED
LOAD C
LOAD B
LIST
CF
1
2
3
4
5
ROW B
(LOAD B)
FEED
ROW A
(LOAD A)
FEED
LIST
CA
THIS CIRCUIT BREAKER
NOT EQUIPPED WITH SHUNT.
PARTIAL FRONT VIEW OF
4-ROW CABINET IN
SUPPLEMENTAL BAY
NOTE: No shunt leads are
present on List CA. Therefore,
there are no "Load A" circuit
breaker shunt leads in this
cabinet.
Figure 4-11B
Distribution Option Example Showing Circuit Breaker Shunt Lead Numbering Scheme
(Numbers shown on circuit breakers do not appear on actual device.)
Page 4-48
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Place jumper
on pin 1 ONLY.
16
Do not use.
15
3 2 1
14
RED
13
BLACK
BAY 1 #4
J2
12
3 2 1
Do not use.
11
J102
RED
10
TB1
3 2 1
J202
8
Do not use.
7
3 2 1
J302
BAY 1 #3
BLACK
9
6
RED
5
BLACK
4
BAY 1 #2
Do not use.
3
2
RED
1
BLACK
506336
BAY 1 #1
NOTE: LEADS FROM FIRST FOUR SHUNTS SHOWN.
REPEAT PATTERN AS REQUIRED ON ADDITIONAL
CARDS FOR ALL REMAINING SHUNT LEADS.
Figure 4-11C
Typical Shunt Lead Connections to a
Four Input Analog Circuit Card in the LMS1000
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-49
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
-
BLACK
15
+
RED
14
-
BLACK
13
+
-
RED
11
+
RED
10
-
BLACK
9
+
-
16
12
TB1
8
BAY 1 #7
BLACK
BAY 1 #6
BLACK
BAY 1 #4
+
RED
6
-
BLACK
+
-
RED
4
BAY 1 #5
RED
7
5
514528
BAY 1 #8
BAY 1 #3
BLACK
RED
3
+
2
-
BLACK
1
+
RED
BAY 1 #2
BAY 1 #1
NOTE: LEADS FROM FIRST EIGHT SHUNTS SHOWN.
REPEAT PATTERN AS REQUIRED ON ADDITIONAL
CARDS FOR ALL REMAINING SHUNT LEADS.
Figure 4-11D
Typical Shunt Lead Connections to an
Eight Input Analog Circuit Card in the LMS1000
Page 4-50
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INTERBAY AND BAY-TO-BAY CABLE CONNECTIONS
Refer to Figure 4-12 for an interbay and bay-to-bay cable diagram.
Interconnect/
LVD Inhibit
Circuit Card
P/N 509532
Interconnect/
LVD Inhibit
Circuit Card
P/N 509532
Rectifier Shelf
Cable
Interface Circuit Card
P/N 509071
P/N 535250
Pigtail
Rectifier Shelf
Cable
Interface Circuit Card
P/N 509071
P/N 535250
Cable
P/N 514334
or 100916
External Alarm Cable
P/N 514327 Connects Here
(if List 71 not installed)
on MCA Main Controller
Circuit Card P/N 534868
Pigtail
RS-485 MCA
Interface Circuit Card
(if List 80 installed)
Cable
P/N 514335
or 100575
Cable
P/N 529120
Distribution Cabinet
(inside view)
Distribution Cabinet
(inside view)
Cable P/N 500819
from RS-485 Circuit Card
to LMS1000 (if installed)
Cable
P/N 514608
Connect Cable P/N 529120 between
pigtail on Circuit Card P/N 535250 and
connector coming out of top of Rectifier Shelf.
Optional LMS1000 Monitoring System
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Note 1
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Supplemental Bay
Rectifier Shelf (rear view)
Main Bay
Note 1: P/O Rectifier Shelf internal wire harness.
Mating connectors provided so that harness
exiting bottom of one cabinet plugs into harness
exiting top of cabinet installed beneath it.
Figure 4-12
Interbay and Bay-to-Bay Cable Diagram
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-51
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Factory Connected Interbay Cables
Bay's Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card to MCA Interconnect Cable
(MCA Rectifier Module Control Signal)
Note: This cable is factory connected. You can use this procedure to verify the
connection.
A cable (P/N 509071) is factory connected between the Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit
card P/N 535250 located in the Bay's Distribution Cabinet and the Interconnect/LVD
Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 located in the same Distribution Cabinet, as shown in
Figure 4-12.
Bay's Rectifier Shelf Interface Circuit Card to Top-Most Rectifier Module Mounting
Shelf Interconnect Cable (MCA Rectifier Module Control Signal)
Note: This cable is factory connected. You can use this procedure to verify the
connection.
A cable (P/N 529120) is factory connected between the pigtail located on Rectifier Shelf
Interface circuit card P/N 535250 located in the Bay's Distribution Cabinet and the
connector exiting the top of the top most installed Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
located in the same Distribution Cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-12.
Bay's Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf to Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf
Interconnect Cable (MCA Rectifier Module Control Signal)
Note: This cable is factory connected. You can use this procedure to verify the
connection.
Rectifier Module Mounting Shelves located within the same bay are interconnected via
the shelf's internal wiring harness. A connector exits the top and bottom of each Rectifier
Module Mounting Shelf. The cable exiting the bottom of one Rectifier Module Mounting
Shelf is connected to the mating connector exiting the top of the shelf installed below it.
MCA to LMS1000 Interface Cable and LMS1000 Input Power Cable (Main Bay Only)
Note: These cables are factory connected. You can use this procedure to verify the
connections or to make the connections in a field installed LMS1000.
Page 4-52

A cable (P/N 500819) is factory connected between the RS 485 circuit card installed
on the MCA located within the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet and the OEM3 jack
labeled "Vortex RS485" located on back of the LMS1000 shelf.

A cable (P/N 514608) is factory connected between the input power connector
located on back of the LMS1000 shelf and the "Internally Fused Voltage Source"
terminals located on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card 509532 located within the
Main Bay Distribution Cabinet.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Field Installed LMS1000 Cable Connection Procedure:
Note: Refer to Figures 4-13 and 4-14.
1) Open the front door of the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding
the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3) Connect one end of the furnished cable (P/N 500819) to the connector labeled
'Vortex RS485' located on the back of the LMS1000 shelf. Route the cable up
into the Distribution Cabinet and UNDER the bracket shown in Figure 4-14.
Connect the remaining end of the cable to connector J1 on the RS-485 Interface
circuit card.
4) Form all harness wires for best fit, bundling and securing as required with
furnished plastic cable ties.
5) Refer to Figure 4-13 and connect cable P/N 514608 to terminal block TB1
located on the back of the LMS1000 as follows:

Connect the RED wire to the terminal labeled “–”.

Connect the BLACK wire to the terminal labeled “+“.
6) From the back of the LMS1000 route the cable up into the Main Bay Distribution
Cabinet, along the right-hand side (front view) to the vicinity of terminal block
TB1on the Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card. Refer to Figure 4-14.
7) Connect the cable to terminal block TB1on the Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit
card as follows:

Connect the RED wire to terminal 7.

Connect the BLACK wire to terminal 6.
8) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
9) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-53
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
LMS1000
REAR VIEW
PLUG CABLE FROM MCA RS-485
INTERFACE CIRCUIT CARD HERE
TERMINAL BLOCK TB1.
CONNECT LMS BATTERY
INPUT JUMPERS
(P/N 514608) HERE.
BLACK
RED
VORTEX RS-485
Figure 4-13
Connections on Back of LMS1000
Page 4-54
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
J1
PLUG CABLE FROM
LMS1000 RS-485 PORT HERE
RS-485 INTERFACE
CIRCUIT CARD (P/O LIST 80)
P/N 514608 CABLE
FROM LMS1000
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF DISTRIBUTION CABINET
ROUTE CABLE FROM LMS1000
RS-485 PORT UNDER THIS BRACKET.
LMS BATTERY
INPUT JUMPERS
P/N 514608
1
12
TB1
CONNECT BLACK TO TERMINAL 6
CONNECT RED TO TERMINAL 7
Figure 4-14
LMS1000 Connections to Main Bay Distribution Cabinet
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-55
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Customer Connected Bay-to-Bay Cables
Bay-to-Bay 'MCA Rectifier Module Control Signal' Interconnect Cable
Note: Applies only if power system includes a supplemental bay that contains Rectifier
Module Mounting Shelves. If the supplemental bay is “distribution only” (List 4
option), these connections are not required.
Procedure:
Note: Refer to Figure 4-15.
1) For each bay in the power system, open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet
by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) For each bay in the power system, remove the clear plastic panel that covers the
circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw
heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3) Connect one end of the supplied interconnecting cable to any unoccupied
connector J8, J9, or J10 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532
located within the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. Connect the remaining cable
end to any unoccupied connector J8, J9, or J10 on Interconnect/LVD Inhibit
circuit card P/N 509532 located within the Supplemental Bay Distribution
Cabinet. Route this cable through the opening provided in the back of each
Distribution Cabinet.

Cable P/N 514335 is provided with List 2 (7.5' cable).

Cable P/N 100575 is provided with List 5 (25' cable).
4) If no more connections required: For each bay in the power system, reinstall
the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on
its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through the
keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
5) If no more connections required: For each bay in the power system, close the
Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the
captive fastener.
Page 4-56
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
CONNECTION POINTS SHOWN
ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. CONNECT
TO ANY UNOCCUPIED J8, J9, OR
J10 ON EACH CIRCUIT CARD.
CABLE
PART NO. 514335 (7-1/2 FT.)
OR
PART NO. 100575 (25 FT.)
J13
J8
J9
J13
J8
J10
J3
J9
J10
J3
-48V
J1
J7
INT.
J2
-48V
J4
INT.
J5 J6
J1
J7
J2
J4
J5 J6
+24V
+24V
EXT.
J12
EXT.
J12
INTERCONNECT/LVD
INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509532 IN
SUPPLEMENTAL BAY
DISTRIBUTION CABINET
INTERCONNECT/LVD
INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509532 IN
MAIN BAY
DISTRIBUTION CABINET
Figure 4-15
'MCA Rectifier Module Control Signal' Cable Connections Between Bays
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-57
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Bay-to-Bay 'MCA Distribution Control Signal' Interconnect Cable
Note: Applies only if power system includes more than one bay.
Procedure:
Note: Refer to Figure 4-16.
1) For each bay in the power system, open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet
by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) For each bay in the power system, remove the clear plastic panel that covers the
circuit cards at the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove
the two screws that secure the cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw
heads clear the keyhole slots in the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3) Connect one end of the supplied interconnecting cable to connector J1 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 located within the Main Bay
Distribution Cabinet. Connect the remaining cable end to connector J2 on
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card P/N 509532 located within the
Supplemental Bay Distribution Cabinet. Route this cable through the opening
provided in the back of each Distribution Cabinet.

Cable P/N 514334 is provided with List 2 (6' cable).

Cable P/N 100916 is provided with List 5 (25' cable).
Note: Connector J2 on the Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card in the Main Bay
is not used.
Note: If an optional Lorain® Model LBD800 or LBD2000 Battery Disconnect Panel will be
connected to the MCA of this system (to connector J1 on Part No. 509532
Interconnect/LVD Inhibit circuit card), the connection will be made to either the
main bay (single bay system) or the last supplemental bay (multiple bay system).
Refer to the Model LBD800 or LBD2000 instruction manual for details.
4) If no more connections required: For each bay in the power system, reinstall
the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the cover on
its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through the
keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
5) If no more connections required: For each bay in the power system, close the
Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning the
captive fastener.
Page 4-58
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
CABLE
PART NO 514334 (6 FT.)
OR
PART NO. 100916 (25 FT.)
J13
J8
J9
J13
J8
J10
J3
J9
J10
J3
-48V
J1
J7
INT.
J2
-48V
J4
INT.
J5 J6
J1
J7
J2
J4
J5 J6
+24V
+24V
EXT.
J12
EXT.
J12
INTERCONNECT/LVD
INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509532 IN
SUPPLEMENTAL BAY
DISTRIBUTION CABINET
INTERCONNECT/LVD
INHIBIT CIRCUIT CARD
P/N 509532 IN
MAIN BAY
DISTRIBUTION CABINET
Figure 4-16
'MCA Distribution Control Signal' Cable Connections Between Bays
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-59
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
CONNECTIONS TO LIST 63 AND 64 CONVERTER SHELVES
Note: If List 63 or 64 are not provided, skip this procedure.
Note: If the power system was ordered in a relay rack, this procedure has been
performed at the factory.
Connecting List 63 and 64 Converter Shelves Alarm Cable Harness
Procedure
1) Locate Alarm Cable Harness P/N 524807 furnished with List 63.
2) Locate the 9-pin subsystem alarm connector at the bottom of the Distribution
Cabinet. If not already done, bring this connector out through the opening at the
rear of the cabinet bottom panel.
3) Connect the Alarm Cable Harness between the Distribution Cabinet Alarm
Connector and the Alarm Connectors located on the List 63 and 64 Converter
Shelves, as shown in Figure 4-17. The harness must enter the Converter
Shelves through the opening shown in Figure 4-17.
Connecting List 63 and 64 Converter Shelf Output Cables
Procedure
1) Locate Output Cables in kit P/N 528874. One kit is provided with List 63 and one
with List 64. Each kit consists of two (2) Output Cables labeled /+/.
2) Open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
3) Loosen (2) screws holding the plastic shield over the circuit breakers or
fuseholders, slide shield upwards and remove.
4) Connect one end of the Output Cables to the associated Distribution Bus Module
subsystem input terminals as shown in Figure 4-18. Apply electrical antioxidizing compound to lug mating surfaces before connecting. Torque as
specified in Figure 4-18.
5) Route the Output Cables installed in the previous step over the top of the
Distribution Bus Module, towards the rear of the cabinet, and down through the
opening in the bottom of the Distribution Cabinet.
6) Install the shield removed in a previous step. To do so, position the shield and
slide downwards on screws. Tighten screws.
7) Close the front door of the Distribution Cabinet.
8) Remove the rear cover from each Converter Shelf by first loosening the screws
that secure it.
Page 4-60
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
9) Route the Output Cables previously connected to the Distribution Cabinet into
the Converter Shelves through the opening shown in Figure 4-17. Apply
electrical anti-oxidizing compound to lug mating surfaces before connecting.
Torque as specified in the Figure 4-17.
10) Reinstall the Converter Shelves rear covers.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-61
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
OUTPUT CABLES
FURNISHED IN KIT P/N 528824
OUTPUT CABLES
FURNISHED IN KIT P/N 528824
To Subsystem Distribution
Bus Modules installed
in Distribution Cabinet.
To Subsystem Distribution
Bus Modules installed
in Distribution Cabinet.
ALARM CABLE HARNESS P/N 524807
To alarm connector at
bottom of Distribution Cabinet.
List 63 Converter Shelf
Alarm Connector for List 64.
Tie back if no List 64.
List 64 Converter Shelf
Alarm Connector Location
Alarm Cable and Output
Cables Enter Shelf Here.
Connect output cables here.
Torque to 84 in-lbs.
List 63/64 Converter Shelf
Figure 4-17
Connecting Converter Shelves Alarm Cable Harness and Output Cables
Page 4-62
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
GROUND
BUSBAR
CONNECT LIST 63 OR 64
OUTPUT CABLES
(LABELED /+/) HERE.
USING EXISTING HARDWARE.
TORQUE TO 84 IN-LBS.
LIST KA SHOWN, OTHER LISTS SIMILAR
Figure 4-18
Connecting Converter Shelf Output Cables to Associated Distribution Bus Module
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-63
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INSTALLING BAY-TO-BAY BUSBARS (LIST 2 ONLY)
When List 2 is ordered, Bay-to-Bay Busbars and hardware are provided for system power
connections between Distribution Cabinets. Interconnect per Figure 4-19.
Note: Upper and lower busbars are similar,
but not identical. When correctly installed,
lower busbar projects farther out from rear
of cabinet than upper busbar.
3/8-16 x 1-1/4" Bolt
3/8" Belleville Lock Washer
3/8" Flat Washer
(3) per Busbar
Torque to 180 inch pounds.
Part No. 509677
Z-Shaped Busbar
Part of List 2
Install (1) per Bay.
3/8-16 x 1-1/4" Bolt
3/8" Belleville Lock Washer
3/8" Flat Washer
(3) per Busbar
Torque to 180 inch pounds.
Part No. 513749
Z-Shaped Busbar
Part of List 2
Install (1) per Bay.
Figure 4-19 (cont’d on next page)
Installing Bay-to Bay Busbars (List 2 Only)
Page 4-64
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
ORIENT BUSBARS AS SHOWN.
SEE DETAIL A FOR ASSEMBLY ORDER.
GND
BUS
BAT
BUS
DETAIL A
ASSEMBLY ORDER
(GND BUS SHOWN; BAT BUS SIMILAR)
Z-Shaped Busbar
(Previously Installed)
Part No. 509681
Nut Plate
Part No. 509685 Flat Interbay
Busbar (with Captive Nuts)
Part No. 509686 Flat
Interbay Busbar
3/8" Flat Washer
3/8" Belleville Lock Washer
3/8-16 x 1-3/4" Bolt
Torque to 180 inch pounds
Figure 4-19 (cont’d from previous page)
Installing Interbay Busbars (List 2 Only)
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-65
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
CABLE CONNECTION(S) TO THE MCA INTERFACE OPTION
RS-485 MCA Interface Option Connection
(List 80 Only)
When the RS-485 MCA Interface Option is installed, a SMART Monitoring System is
connected to the RJ-45 connector located on the RS-485 circuit card installed in the Main
Bay Distribution Cabinet, as detailed in the previous procedure "Field Installed LMS1000
Cable Connection Procedure".
With the RS-485 MCA Interface Option installed, maximum cable length is 4000 feet.
Modem MCA Interface Option Connection
(Lists 72 and 74 Only)
When the Modem or RS-232/Modem MCA Interface Option is installed, the remote
access phone line is connected to the RJ-11 jack (J1, Modem) located on the Modem or
RS-232/Modem circuit card installed in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet. Refer to
Figure 4-20 for location.
The MCA can be accessed using WinLink installed on a remote PC.
Procedure
1) Open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3) Connect a cable from the RJ-11 connector (J1, Modem) located on the Modem
circuit card installed in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet to a phone line
dedicated to this MCA.
4) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
5) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
Page 4-66
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
JI
(Typical location on Modem or RS-485
crcuit card, Ethernet and RS-232/Modem
card slightly different configuration.)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
VIEW WITH DOOR OPEN LOOKING
DOWN AT BOTTOM OF CABINET
Figure 4-20
MCA Interface Option Connector Locations and Identification
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-67
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
RS-232 MCA Interface Option Connection
(List 74 Only)
When the RS-232/Modem MCA Interface Option is installed, a remote access PC can be
connected to the 9-pin female D-Type connector located on the front of the Main
Distribution Cabinet. Refer to Figure 4-21 and Table 4-3 for connector pin-outs.
With the RS-232/Modem MCA Interface Option installed, maximum recommended cable
length is 100 feet.
The MCA can be accessed using WinLink installed on the remote PC.
Procedure
1) Connect a cable from the 9-pin female D-Type connector, located at the right
hand side of the Main Distribution Cabinet front panel, to a PC running WinLink.
5
1
9 6
Figure 4-21
Front Panel RS-232 Port (if furnished)
RS-232 Port
Pin
Application
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
-Transmitted Data (TxD)
Received Data (RxD)
Data Set Ready (/DSR)
Signal Ground (GND)
Data Terminal Ready (/DTR)
Clear to Send (/CTS)*
Request to Send (/RTS)*
--
*
Hardware Handshake Signal
(when RTS/CTS Hardware
Handshake Enabled)
Table 4-3
Front Panel RS-232 Port Pinouts (if furnished)
Page 4-68
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Ethernet MCA Interface Option Connection
(Lists 75-78 Only)
Perform the procedure under Setting Up the MCA Ethernet Option in CHAPTER 5.
INSTALLING RECTIFIER MODULES AND INITIALLY STARTING THE SYSTEM to
program the IP parameters into the MCA Ethernet card. If you installed an MCA Ethernet
card that supports SNMP, you will also set the SNMP parameters when you perform the
procedure.
The MCA is connected to the customer's network running TCP/IP via the RJ-45 10BaseT
jack located on the MCA Ethernet circuit card installed in the Main Distribution Cabinet,
labeled "J1, Ethernet". Refer to Figure 4-20 for location. Jack pin configuration is a
standard Ethernet scheme, twisted pair.
Note: Use shielded Ethernet cable (grounded at both ends). Note that the MCA RJ-45
jack is connected to chassis ground.
Note that a Front Access Ethernet Connector Kit P/N 525110 may be installed,
allowing you to make the Ethernet cable connection at the front of the MCA Panel.
The MCA can be accessed using WinLink installed on a remote PC. The MCA can also
be accessed via a Web-Browser from the PC. An Ethernet Interface option is also
available that adds SNMP support and Battery Monitoring.
Procedure
1) Open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
2) Remove the clear plastic panel that covers the circuit cards at the bottom of the
cabinet. To do so, loosen but do not remove the two screws that secure the
cover. Slide the cover to the front until the screw heads clear the keyhole slots in
the cover. Then lift the cover out of the cabinet.
3) Connect a network cable to the Ethernet connector (J1, Ethernet) located on the
Ethernet circuit card in the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet.
4) Reinstall the clear plastic cover in the bottom of the cabinet. To do so, place the
cover on its two mounting posts so that the mounting screw heads pass through
the keyhole slots in the cover. Slide the cover towards the back. Tighten the two
screws.
5) Close the Distribution Cabinet's front door. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fastener.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-69
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
LOAD CONNECTIONS TO DISTRIBUTION CABINET(S)
Note: Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 for recommended wire sizes
and crimp lugs. Refer also to the SAG for maximum size of wire to connect to the
various lug landing points. Refer to drawing 031110100 for lug crimping
information. Refer to drawings 031110200 and 031110300 for additional lug
information. The SAG and Engineering Drawings can be accessed from the CD
(Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system. A copy of
drawings 031110100, 031110200, and 031110300 are also located in the
hardcopy INSTALLATION MANUAL for your convenience.
Refer to the following table for supplemental lug crimping information when using
the special application crimp lug / strap combination.
SUPPLEMENTAL LUG CRIMPING INFORMATION
Crimp Lug Part No.
Color Key
Die Index/
Code No.
Die Cat.
Number
PINK
42H
15508
245393500
Burndy: YA25L-4TCG1
245393600
Burndy: YA26L-4TCG1
BLACK
45
15526
245393700
Burndy: YA27L-4TCG1
ORANGE
50
15530
Burndy: YA28L-4TCG1
PURPLE
54H
15511
YELLOW
62
15510
RED
71
15514
245393800
514872
514873
1
Page 4-70
Crimp Tool Required1, T&B Model
TBM12 or TBM15 Hydraulic Heads
T & B: 256-30695-1879
Burndy: YA29L-4TCG1
T & B: 256-30695-1880
Burndy: YA31L-4TCG1
The lugs should be crimped to the specifications given in the
manufacturer’s instructions furnished with the crimp tool or lug.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Distribution Assemblies Wiring Illustrations
Table 4-4 cross-references the List Number of the available Distribution Assemblies with
the wiring illustrations provided in this section.
List No.
P/N 509128
AA, AN
AB, AC, CB, CD
AD, AE
AG, AH, AJ,
CG, CJ, AP
AK, AL
AM
BA
CA
CE, CF
EA
GB
JA
See
Figure 422
List No.
See
Figure 422
A
B
C
D
JB
JC
JD
KA
N
O
P
Q
E
LB
R
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
LC
NA
NB
NC
ND
RA, RB
RC, RD, RE
TA, TB
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Table 4-4
Distribution Bus Assembly Wiring Illustrations
Connecting Loads to Distribution Assemblies
Equipped with Bullet Nose Type Distribution Devices
(TPS/TLS Fuses and/or Bullet Nose-Type Circuit Breakers)
Lug-terminated load leads are connected to the individual load busbars located on the
Distribution Bus Module and the respective distribution ground busbar. To access these,
open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener
in the counterclockwise position.

The individual load busbars provide 1/4-20 threaded holes or studs for installation of
customer-provided two-hole lugs that have 5/8 inch centers and 1/4 inch bolt
clearance holes. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware.

The distribution ground busbar provides 1/4-20 studs for installation of the same type
of customer-provided lugs. Customer must provide lug mounting hardware.
Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 4-22 for lug mounting location and identification,
as well as recommended torque. Maximum size of wire to be connected to a single
position is 2 AWG. When special application crimp lug/strap combination is used,
maximum wire size is as listed in SAG582126000.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-71
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Note: LOAD A Bus may be arranged with battery disconnect fuse(s)/circuit breakers.
Refer to the CIRCUIT DESIGNATION REFERENCE CARDS furnished inside the
cabinet's front door for location of any battery disconnect fuse(s)/circuit breakers
installed.
Connecting Loads to Distribution Assemblies Equipped
with TPH-Type Distribution Fuse Mounting Blocks and/or
GJ/218-Type Distribution Circuit Breaker Mounting Blocks
Lug-terminated load leads are connected to the individual load busbars located on the
Distribution Bus Module and the respective distribution ground busbar. To access these,
open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener
in the counterclockwise position.

The individual load busbars provide 3/8-16 captive nuts for installation of customerprovided two-hole lugs that have 1 inch centers and 3/8 inch bolt clearance holes.
Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware.

The distribution ground busbar provides 3/8-16 captive nuts for installation of the
same type of customer-provided lugs. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts
and hardware.
Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 4-22 for lug mounting location and identification,
as well as recommended torque.
Note: LOAD A Bus may be arranged with battery disconnect fuse(s)/circuit breakers.
Refer to the CIRCUIT DESIGNATION REFERENCE CARDS furnished inside the
cabinet's front door for location of any battery disconnect fuse(s)/circuit breakers
installed.
Connecting Loads to a P/N 509128 GMT Fuse
Distribution Circuit Card Assembly
Load conductors are connected to terminal block TB1 on the circuit card assembly. To
access TB1, open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the
captive fastener in the counterclockwise position. TB1 provides screw clamp type
terminals for customer connection. Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 4-22 for
location and identification, and for recommended torque.
Connecting Loads to Bulk Feed Distribution Assemblies
Lug-terminated load leads are connected to the bulk feed load busbar located on the
Distribution Bus Module and the respective distribution ground busbar. To access these,
open the front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener
in the counterclockwise position.
Page 4-72

The bulk feed load busbar provides 3/8-16 captive nuts for installation of customerprovided two-hole lugs that have 1 inch centers and 3/8 inch bolt clearance holes.
Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware.

The distribution ground busbar provides 3/8-16 captive nuts for installation of the
same type of customer-provided lugs. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts
and hardware.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 4-22 for lug mounting location and identification,
as well as recommended torque.
GMT DISTRIBUTION
FUSE CIRCUIT CARD
ASSEMBLY, P/N 509128
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
1A
10A
TERMINAL
BLOCK TB1
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
1B
DISTRIBUTION
FUSES F1-F10
10B
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
F11
F12
NOTE:
GMT-TYPE FUSE DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY SHOWN IN TYPICAL LOCATION IN
TYPICAL BULLET NOSE TYPE DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY.
TB1 TERMINALS 1A THROUGH 10A AND 1B THROUGH 10B CORRESPOND TO
LOAD FUSES F1 THROUGH F10.
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (in-lbs)
Screw Clamp
Screw Clamp
5.0
Figure 4-22 (Detail A)
Part No. 509128 GMT Fuse Distribution Assembly Load Connections
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-73
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
F24/
CB24
LOAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS/FUSES
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded holes or studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
TORQUE (in-lbs)
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail B)
List AA and AN Load Connections
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD and LOAD RETURN (GND)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers. Customer to provide lugs, bolts,
and hardware. Bolt length: 1-1/4".
LVD
CONTACTOR
(IF PRESENT)
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail C)
List AB, AC, CB, and CD Load Connections
Page 4-74
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD and LOAD RETURN (GND)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers. Customer to provide lugs, bolts,
and hardware. Bolt length: 1-1/4".
TORQUE (in-lbs.)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail D)
List AD or AE Load Connections
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-75
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
LIST CG SHOWN.
LISTS AG, AJ, CJ, AP SIMILAR.
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD
FUSE
LOAD
FUSE
LVD
CONTACTOR
(IF PRESENT)
LIST AH
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD and LOAD RETURN (GND)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers. Customer to provide lugs, bolts,
and hardware. Bolt length: 1-1/4".
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail E)
List AG, AJ, CG or CJ Load Connections (List AP similar)
List AH Load Return Connections
Page 4-76
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
LIST AK
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
F1/
CB1
LOAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS/FUSES
F24/
CB24
MAKE LOAD RETURN CONNECTIONS TO
AN EXTERNAL LOAD RETURN BUS OR
TO LIST AL IF PROVIDED.
LIST AL
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail F)
List AK Load Connections
List AL Load Return Connections
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-77
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
LOAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS/FUSES
F20/
CB20
EMPTY
MOUNTIG
POSITION
LOAD
INPUT DISCONNECT
CIRCUIT BREAKER/FUSE
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail G)
List AM Load Connections
NON-LVD-CONTROLLED
SYSTEM LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LVD-CONTROLLED
SYSTEM LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
LVD-CONTROLLED
F8/ F9/
F20/
SYSTEM LOAD
CB8 CB9
CB20
NON-LVDFUSES/CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CONTROLLED
SYSTEM LOAD
FUSES/CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F1/
CB1
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail H)
List BA Load Connections
Page 4-78
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
LOAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS/FUSES
LOAD
F20/
LVD
CB20 CONTACTOR
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
TORQUE (in-lbs)
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer)
Figure 4-22 (Detail I)
List CA Load Connections
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
UPPER LVD
CONTACTOR
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
CONTROLLED BY UPPER
LVD CONTACTOR
LOAD CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
CONTROLLED BY LOWER
LVD CONTACTOR
LOWER LVD
CONTACTOR
LOAD and LOAD RETURN (GND)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail J)
List CE or CF Load Connections
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-79
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
MAKE BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
PER FIGURE 6-12.
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD CIRCUIT
BREAKERS/FUSES
F1/
CB1
LOAD
F16/
CB16
BATTERY
DISCONNNECT
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
Torque (in-lbs)
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail K)
List EA Load and Battery Connections
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F8/
CB8
F1/
CB1
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD
BATTERY
DISCONNECT
FUSE
LVD
CONTACTOR
MAKE BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
PER FIGURE 3-12.
LOAD RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer)
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock
Washer)
300 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer)
Figure 4-22 (Detail L)
List GB Load and Battery Connections
Page 4-80
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
+24V SUBSYSTEM LOAD
FUSES/CIRCUIT BREKAERS
F16/
CB16
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
F17/
CB17
F20/
CB20
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 4-22 (Detail M)
List JA Load Connections
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
+24V
F8/
F9/
CB9
SUBSYSTEM CB8
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
F1/
CB1
-48V
SYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F20/
CB20
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 4-22 (Detail N)
List JB Load Connections
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-81
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
+24V LOADS
(SUBSYSTEM) +24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
-48V LOADS
(SYSTEM)
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware.
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 4-22 (Detail O)
List JC Load Connections
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
+24V LOADS
(SUBSYSTEM)
-48V LOADS
(SYSTEM)
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware.
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 4-22 (Detail P)
List JD Load Connections
Page 4-82
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
+24V SUBSYSTEM LOAD
FUSES/CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F1/
CB1
F16/
CB16
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
F17/
CB17
F20/
CB20
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 4-22 (Detail Q)
List KA Load Connections
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
+24V
-48V
LVD
F9/
F8/
F16/
CB9
CB16 CONTACTOR
SUBSYSTEM CB8
SYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
F1/
CB1
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 4-22 (Detail R)
List LB Load Connections
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-83
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
-48V SYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
+24V SUBSYSTEM
LOAD CONNECTIONS
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
F5/
CB5
F4/
CB4
+24V
SUBSYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F16/
CB16
-48V
SYSTEM
LOAD FUSES/
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LVD
CONTACTOR
+24V INPUT
From DC-DC Converters
(Factory Connection)
LOAD
LOAD RETURN (GND)
Torque (In. Lbs.)
1/4 –20 threaded holes on
5/8” centers, customer to provide
lugs, bolts & hardware. Bolt length: 3/4'”
1/4 –20 threaded studs on
5/8” centers, customer to
provide lugs & hardware
72 (Standard flat
& lock washers)
Figure 4-22 (Detail S)
List LC Load Connections
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
BATT. RETURN
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
F1/
CB1
BATTERY DISCONNECT
FUSES/CIRCUIT BREAKERS
BATTERY
F20/
CB20
BATTERY RETURN (GND)
1/4–20 threaded holes on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 3/4".
1/4–20 threaded studs on 5/8” centers.
Customer to provide lugs and hardware.
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and
Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail T)
List NA Battery Connections
Page 4-84
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS.
CONNECT PER
FIGURE 3-12.
BATTERY DISCONNECT
CIRCUIT BREAKER(S)
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Torque (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock).
Figure 4-22 (Detail U)
List NB Battery Connections
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
BATTERY
DISCONNECT
FUSE
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail V)
List NC Battery Connections
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-85
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
BATTERY DISCONNECT
FUSES
MAKE BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
PER FIGURE 3-12.
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail W)
List ND Battery Connections
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
MAKE BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
PER FIGURE 3-12.
BATTERY DISCONNECT
CONTACTOR
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Torque (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail X)
List RA or RB Battery Connections
Page 4-86
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
TOP OF
DISTRIBUTION
CABINET
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
GROUND
BUSBAR
EXTENSION
PLATE
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
CONNECTIONS
REAR VIEW
BATTERY (LOAD SIDE)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers.
Customer to provide lugs, bolts, and hardware.
Bolt length: 1-1/4".
Torque (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail Y)
List RC, RD, and RE Battery Connections
(List RC shown; List RD and RE similar)
GROUND
BUSBAR
LOAD RETURN
CONNECTIONS
LOAD
CONNECTIONS
LOAD and LOAD RETURN (GND)
3/8-16 captive nuts on 1” centers. Customer to provide lugs, bolts,
and hardware. Bolt length: 1-1/4".
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer).
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer).
Figure 4-22 (Detail Z)
List TA and TB Bulk Feed Load Distribution
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-87
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
BATTERY CONNECTIONS TO POWER SYSTEM
Danger: Although battery voltage is not hazardously high, the battery can deliver
large amounts of current. Exercise extreme caution not to inadvertently
contact or have any tool inadvertently contact a battery terminal or
exposed wire connected to a battery terminal. NEVER allow a metal
object, such as a tool, to contact more than one termination at a time, or
to simultaneously contact a termination and a grounded object. Even a
momentary short circuit can cause explosion and injury. Remove
watches, rings, or other jewelry before connecting battery leads. Make
the DC (battery) connections last. Make all other electrical connections
without DC input power applied to the system.
Note: Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 for recommended wire sizes
and crimp lugs. Refer to drawing 031110100 for lug crimping information. Refer
to drawings 031110200 and 031110300 for additional lug information. The SAG
and Engineering Drawings can be accessed from the CD (Electronic
Documentation Package) furnished with your system. A copy of drawings
031110100, 031110200, and 031110300 are also located in the hardcopy
INSTALLATION MANUAL for your convenience.
There are four methods of connecting the battery, as determined by the bus arrangement
and List options specified when the system was ordered.
If NO Internal Battery Disconnect Device is Provided

Directly to the Battery Busbar and Battery Ground Busbar: Lug-terminated input
battery leads are connected to the battery busbar and battery return (ground) busbar
located within a Distribution Cabinet. To access these, open the front door of the
Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the
counterclockwise position.
These busbars are provided with 3/8-16 and 1/4-20 captive nuts for installation of
customer provided two hole lugs with 1 or 5/8 inch centers and 3/8 or 1/4 inch bolt
clearance holes, respectively. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and
additional hardware. Refer to Figures 4-23A, 4-23B, 4-23C, and 4-23D for lug
mounting location and identification, as well as recommended bolt length and torque.

Directly to Bay-to-Bay Busbars (if power system is equipped with List 2 only):
Battery busbars within the Distribution Cabinets are rated for 2000A maximum. For
2000A to 4000A, additional lug-terminated input battery leads should be connected to
the bay-to-bay battery busbar and battery return (ground) busbar that link the
Distribution Cabinets in List 1 and List 2 bays.
These busbars are provided with 3/8-16 and 1/4-20 captive nuts for installation of
customer provided two hole lugs with 1 or 5/8 inch centers and 3/8 or 1/4-inch bolt
clearance holes, respectively. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and
additional hardware. Refer to Figure 4-23E for lug mounting location and
identification, as well as recommended bolt length and torque.
Page 4-88
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
If Internal Battery Disconnect Fuses or Circuit Breakers are Provided

When Distribution Bus Modules Using Bullet Nose-Type Devices (TPS/TLS
Fuses and/or Bullet Nose-Type Circuit Breakers) are Provided: Lug-terminated
input battery leads are connected to the individual battery busbars located on the
Distribution Bus Module and the respective battery return (ground) busbar located in
the Distribution Cabinet. To access these, open the front door of the Distribution
Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise position.
Refer to the CIRCUIT DESIGNATION REFERENCE CARDS furnished inside the
cabinet's front door for location of any battery disconnect fuse(s) or circuit breaker(s)
installed.
Battery Load Side: The individual input battery busbars provide 1/4-20 threaded
holes for installation of customer-provided two-hole lugs that have 5/8 inch centers
and 1/4 inch bolt clearance holes. Customer must provide lug mounting hardware.
Maximum size of wire to be connected to a single breaker/fuseholder mounting
position is 2 AWG. When special application crimp lug / strap combination is used,
maximum wire size is as listed in SAG582126000. Refer to the appropriate detail of
Figure 4-22 for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended bolt
length and torque.
Battery Return (Ground) Side: The battery return (ground) busbar provides 3/8-16
and 1/4-20 captive nuts for installation of customer-provided two-hole lugs that have
1 or 5/8 inch centers and 3/8 or 1/4 inch bolt clearance holes, respectively. Customer
must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware. Refer to the appropriate detail of
Figure 4-22 for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended bolt
length and torque.

When Distribution Bus Modules Using GJ/218 Circuit Breakers or TPH Fuses
are Provided: Lug-terminated input battery leads are connected to the individual
battery busbars located on the Distribution Bus Module and the respective battery
return (ground) busbar located in the Distribution Cabinet. To access these, open the
front door of the Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in
the counterclockwise position. Refer to the CIRCUIT DESIGNATION REFERENCE
CARDS furnished inside the cabinet assembly's front door for location of any battery
disconnect fuse(s) or circuit breaker(s) installed.
Battery Load Side: The individual input battery busbars provide 3/8-16 captive nuts
for installation of customer-provided two-hole lugs that have 1 inch centers and 3/8
inch bolt clearance holes. Customer must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware.
Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure 4-22 for lug mounting location and
identification, as well as recommended bolt length and torque.
Battery Return (Ground) Side: The battery return (ground) busbar provides 3/8-16
and 1/4-20 captive nuts for installation of customer-provided two-hole lugs that have
1 or 5/8 inch centers and 3/8 or 1/4 inch bolt clearance holes, respectively. Customer
must provide lug mounting bolts and hardware. Refer to the appropriate detail of
Figure 4-22 for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended bolt
length and torque.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-89
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
If an Internal Battery Disconnect Contactor is Provided
(List RA, RB, RC, RD, RE)
Lug-terminated input battery leads are connected to the battery return (ground) busbar
and to the battery disconnect contactor busbar. Connections to List RA and RB are
located in the Distribution Cabinet. To access these, open the front door of the
Distribution Cabinet by turning and holding the captive fastener in the counterclockwise
position. Connections to List RC, RD, and RE are made from the rear of the Distribution
Cabinet. To access these, remove a plastic access cover from at the rear of the cabinet
by first loosening the four screws that secure it. Refer to the appropriate detail of Figure
4-22 for lug mounting location and identification, as well as recommended bolt length and
torque.
If a Lorain Battery Stand Under Power System is Provided (List 92)
If the Power System is mounted on top of a Model 24BA1200 Battery Stand (Spec. No.
588810000), busbars for making battery connections to the Power System are provided
with the battery stand, and may have been installed at the factory. Refer to the
documentation provided with the battery stand for installation instructions.
Page 4-90
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
3/8-16 CAPTIVE NUT, 14 PLACES (CUSTOMER MUST
SUPPLY LUG, BOLTS, AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE.
BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
1/4-20 CAPTIVE NUT, 20 PLACES (CUSTOMER
MUST SUPPLY LUG, BOLTS, AND ADDITIONAL
HARDWARE. BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
0.625
Central
Office
Ground
TOP OF
DISTRIBUTION
CABINET
2.000
0.750
0.625
2.000
1.000
0.625
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE) 0.625
BUSBAR
0.750
0.625
0.750
0.750
0.625
0.750
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
BUSBAR
0.625
FRONT VIEW
GND RTN
-48V SUPPLY
(One Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
ISO View
BOLT SIZE
TORQUE (in-lbs.)
1/4–20
72 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
3/8-16
180 (Belleville Lock Washer)
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
Figure 4-23A
Battery Connections (Up to 1200A)
No Battery Disconnect Fuses, Circuit Breakers, or Contactors Provided.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-91
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
3/8 CLEARANCE HOLES, 12 PLACES (CUSTOMER MUST SUPPLY LUG,
BOLTS, AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE. BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
2.000
2.000
2.000
Central
Office
Ground
2.000
TOP OF
DISTRIBUTION
CABINET
1.000
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
BUSBAR
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
BUSBAR
FRONT VIEW
GND RTN
-48V SUPPLY
(One Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
ISO View
BOLT SIZE
3/8-16
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer)
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
Figure 4-23B
Battery Connections (1200A to 2000A), Using Battery Busbar Extension Kit (P/N 514713)
No Battery Disconnect Fuses, Circuit Breakers, or Contactors Provided. No Interbay Busbars Provided.
Page 4-92
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
3/8 CLEARANCE HOLES, 24 PLACES
(CUSTOMER MUST SUPPLY LUG, BOLTS,
AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE.
BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
TOP OF DISTRIBUTION CABINET
Central
Office
Ground 1.312
1.312
1.000
48V
FRONT
VIEW
GND RTN
-48V SUPPLY
BATTERY
(RETURN SIDE)
BUSBAR
BATTERY
(LOAD SIDE)
BUSBAR
Plastic Shield
(One Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
BOLT SIZE
3/8-16
TORQUE (in-lbs)
180 (Belleville Lock Washer)
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
Figure 4-23C
Battery Connections (1200A to 2000A), Using Battery Busbar Extension Kit (P/N 529143)
No Battery Disconnect Fuses, Circuit Breakers, or Contactors Provided. No Interbay Busbars Provided.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-93
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
1/4-20 x 0.875" Studs
on 0.625" Centers,
24 Places (Customer must
supply additional hardware.)
Rear View
(Two Row
Cabinet Shown,
Others Similar)
Plastic Shield
-48V SUPPLY
GND RTN
Up to Six (6) Battery Leads (per polarity)
STUD SIZE
1/4-20 x
0.875” on
0.625” Centers
TORQUE (in-lbs)
72 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
Figure 4-23D
Battery Connections, Using Battery Landing Busbar Kit (P/N 541371)
No Battery Disconnect Fuses, Circuit Breakers, or Contactors Provided. No Interbay Busbars Provided.
Page 4-94
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Battery Lug
Landing Points
See Detail A
GND RETURN
Interbay Busbar Assembly
-48V SUPPLY
Interbay Busbar Assembly
3/8-16 CAPTIVE NUT, 8 PLACES PER BUS
(CUSTOMER MUST PROVIDE LUG BOLTS
AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE. BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
2-3/8"
2-3/8"
13/16"
2-3/8"
13/16"
13/16"
13/16"
Rear View
5/8"
1"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
1-5/8"
1-5/8"
1/4-20 CAPTIVE NUT, 12 PLACES PER BUS
(CUSTOMER MUST PROVIDE LUG BOLTS
AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE. BOLT LENGTH: 1-1/4")
DETAIL A
BOLT SIZE
TORQUE (in-lbs.)
1/4–20
72 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
3/8-16
180 (Belleville Lock Washer)
300 (Standard Flat and Lock Washer)
Figure 4-23E
Battery Connections (1200A to 4000A)
No Battery Disconnect Fuses, Circuit Breakers, or Contactors Provided. Bay-to-Bay Busbars Provided.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-95
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
INSTALLING REAR BUSBAR SHIELD
ONTO THE LMS1000 (LIST 80)
Note: If the power system was ordered in a relay rack, this procedure has been
performed at the factory.
Procedure:
1) Using wire cutters, remove cut-outs from the clear plastic shield as required for
busbar clearance.
2) Fasten the shield to its mounting brackets with furnished hardware as shown in
Figure 4-24.
REAR
VIEW
COVER
P/N 528515
6-32 x 1/2" THREAD FORMING
MACHINE SCREW
(4 PLACES)
Figure 4-24
Installing Rear Busbar Shield on List 80
Page 4-96
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INSTALLING BAY-TO-BAY BUSBAR COVERS
(LIST 2 ONLY)
Procedure
1) After bay-to-bay busbars have been installed, and battery connections made to
them as required, furnished covers should be installed. Refer to Figure 4-25 for
details.
Part No. 513862 End Cover.
2 Furnished with List 2.
Attach each with (2) 6-32 x 3/8" screws,
lock washers and flat washers.
Part No. 117843 Standoff Insulator.
(1) furnished with List 2.
Thread onto 1/4 -20 stud on GND busbar
as shown.
Insert tab on rear cover in
slot on side cover.
(Same on both ends.)
Part No. 513860 Rear Cover.
(1) furnished with List 2.
Attach with (4) 6-32 x 3/8" screws,
lock washers and flat washers and
(1) 1/4-20 x 1/2" screw and flatwasher.
Figure 4-25
Installing Bay-to-Bay Busbar Covers
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-97
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INSTALLING AND CONNECTING BATTERIES IN LIST 93
(IF PROVIDED)
Admonishments
Danger: THIS EQUIPMENT IS USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH LEAD-ACID
BATTERIES. WORKING NEAR LEAD-ACID BATTERIES IS DANGEROUS!

Batteries contain sulfuric acid.

Batteries may generate explosive gases.

Batteries are an energy source that can produce high amounts of
electrical current.
FOR THESE REASONS, IT IS OF CRITICAL IMPORTANCE THAT YOU
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS AND FOLLOW THEM EXACTLY.
WHEN WORKING WITH LEAD-ACID BATTERIES:

Wear complete protection for eyes, face, hands, and clothing.
Examples are safety goggles or face shield, a rubber apron, and
gloves.

If battery acid enters your eye, immediately flush your eye with
running cold water for at least 15 minutes. Get medical attention
immediately.

If battery acid contacts skin or clothing, wash immediately with soap
and water.

NEVER smoke or allow a flame or spark near batteries.

NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one
terminal of a battery at a time, or to simultaneously contact a terminal
and a grounded object (such as the battery enclosure). Even a
momentary short circuit can cause sparking or explosion. To avoid
such short circuits:
 Remove watches, bracelets and rings.
 Use only tools having insulated handles.
 If insulated tools are not available, completely cover tool handles
with a minimum of three half-lapped layers of vinyl electrical tape.
 Ensure that wrenches with more than one working end have only
one end exposed.
Always follow the battery manufacturer's recommendations and
admonishments.

Battery Manufacturer Information
Refer to System Application Guide SAG582126000 for specifications and manufacturers
of the batteries to be installed in this power system.
Page 4-98
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installing and Connecting Batteries
Procedure
Note: Refer to Figure 4-26 as this procedure is performed.
1) If Battery Trays are Equipped With Circuit Breakers: Turn OFF the Battery
Disconnect circuit breakers located on all battery trays. Refer to Figure 4-26 for
locations.
2) Remove the Battery Retention Bracket as shown in Figure 4-26. To do so,
remove the four 1/4-20 x 5/8” bolts and associated washers.
3) Slide batteries into the tray, with the battery terminals toward the front as shown
in Figure 4-26. Slide batteries into the tray as far as they will go.
Note: The Battery Retention Bracket can be oriented two ways to accommodate
batteries of different lengths. A correctly oriented bracket will fit snuggly
against the batteries. If your batteries require the alternate bracket orientation
shown in Detail A of Figure 4-26, remove and reinstall the bullet-shaped
spacers as shown in Detail A before performing the next step.
4) Reinstall the Battery Retention Bracket. The spacers on the bracket should
separate the batteries from each other. Secure with the hardware removed in a
previous step. Refer to Figure 4-26 for washer location.
5) Connect three links supplied by the battery manufacturer between pairs of
battery terminals as shown in Figure 4-26. Use hardware furnished by the
battery manufacturer. Torque hardware to battery manufacturer’s
recommendations.
6) Ensure the battery cable ends in all trays are insulated with sleeving before
performing the next step.
Danger: In multiple-tray installations, when batteries in one tray are
connected, the battery cables in all trays will be energized. Remove
sleeving from and connect one cable at a time. Do not allow cable
end to contact the battery tray or equipment rack.
Warning: In the next step, observe correct polarity. Connect only cable
labeled “+” to battery terminal labeled “+”. Likewise, connect only
cable labeled “–” to battery terminal labeled “–”.
7) Connect the cables found in the battery tray to the battery terminals, “+” to “+”
and”–“ to “– “. Observe correct polarity. Refer to Figure 4-26. Secure with kitfurnished hardware as shown in the figure. Torque hardware to battery
manufacturer’s recommendations.
8) Repeat steps 1 through 7 for any remaining battery trays.
9) If Battery Trays Are Equipped With Circuit Breakers: To connect the
batteries to the Power System, turn ON the Battery Disconnect circuit breakers
located on all battery trays.
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-99
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Connect link furnished
with battery to these
2 terminals.
Connect link furnished
with battery to these
2 terminals.
Connect NEG (-)
battery cable to
this terminal.
Connect link furnished
with battery to these
2 terminals.
Connect POS (+)
battery cable to
this terminal.
Battery Retention
Bracket.
See Detail A for
alternate orientation.
1/4-20 X 5/8" Bolt
1/4" Ground Washer
(1 place)
Spacers
Separate
Batteries
(3 places
per tray)
If trays are
equipped with
circuit breakers,
TURN OFF ALL
circuit breakers
before installing
and connecting
any batteries!
1/4-20 X 5/8" Bolt
1/4" Lock Washer
1/4" Flat Washer
3 Places
Note:
1. Two trays shown
as example.
2. Cabling detail
omitted.
10-32 x 1/2" Pan Head Screw (3 Places)
No. 10 Flat Washer (3 Places)
No. 10 Lock Washer (3 Places)
Spacer (3 Places)
1/4" Ground
Washer
(1 Place)
1/4-20 x 5/8" Hex
Head Screw
(4 Places)
1/4-20 Lock Washer
(3 Places)
1/4-20 Flat Washer
(3 Places)
DETAIL A
Alternate Orientaiton
of Retention Bracket
Figure 4-26
List 93 Battery Installation Details
Page 4-100
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installing Optional Front Battery Cover (23” Trays Only)
Procedure
1) Follow the procedure in Figure 27.
Use existing
battery spacers.
Existing front battery bracket.
Kit supplied spacer bar.
Use kit supplied hardware.
Kit supplied cover.
Assembled View
Procedure
1. Install batteries.
2. Install kit battery cover to
existing front battery bracket.
3. Install kit battery cover with existing
front battery bracket to battery shelf.
Kit Battery Cover
Assembled to Existing
Front Battery Bracket
Front View
Kit Battery Cover
Assembled to Existing
Front Battery Bracket
Rear View
Figure 27
Installing Optional Front Battery Cover
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-101
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installing Optional Circuit Breaker Guard
Procedure
1) Follow the procedure in Figure 28.
1. Remove this bracket.
2. Replace this hardware after
removing existing bracket.
Installed View
3. Install Circuit Breaker
Guard Bracket using
existing hardware.
Figure 28
Installing Optional Circuit Breaker Guard
Page 4-102
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INSTALLING EXTERNAL SHUNT MONITORING KIT P/N 541134
Kit Contents
External Shunt Monitoring Kit P/N 541134 provides the following components.
(1) 433800164 Shunt Monitoring Circuit Card (Shunt POD)
(1) 343364100 Mounting Plate
(4) 233373300 6-32 Screw
(1) 421815700 Jumper
(1) 421815800 Jumper
(1) 541131 Jumper
(6) 246730810 Insulated Butt Splice
(25) 237650200 Cable Tie
(1) 247873700 Socket
(1) 247873800 Plug
(3) 245381600 Pins
(3) 245381700 Pins
Installation Procedure
Refer to Table 4-5 for selecting shunt capacity on the Shunt POD. The remote shunt
must match one of the shunts shown in the table.
The JP1 jumper on the Shunt POD should be set for “system shunt” (open).
Using the (4) 6-32 screws, mount the Shunt POD to the mounting plate. Locate the
mounting plate as close to the remote shunt as possible.
Make the following connections. Refer to Figure 4-27 for a block diagram.
Terminate the flat, black connector onto the Shunt POD.
Connect the black (-Shunt) and red (+Shunt) leads to the remote shunt.
Using the appropriate ends of the jumpers; mate the 421815700, 421815800, and
541131 jumpers as required. (Note that the 421815800 jumper consists of (2)
separate jumpers. One 10' and the other 20'. This gives you three options for length
of 10', 20', or 30'. The 541131 jumper is 10' long.)
If the remote shunt is greater than 40 feet from the 582126000 Power System, the
541131 jumper must be modified to lengthen it. THE SPLICE MUST BE MADE AT
THE POWER SYSTEM END (larger wire should be used if the distance is
significant)! Using the insulated butt splices, cut the 541131 jumper and add the
additional wires for the required length. Ensure the splices are crimped properly.
(Another option is to make a jumper of the appropriate length using the 247873700
socket, 247873800 plug, 245381600 pins, and 245381700 pins. Use 20 or 22 gauge
wire; preferably R-W, W-BK, and BL color. Use hand crimp tool AMP P/N 9144-B.
Terminate one end of the 3 wires with the 245381700 pins and insert into the
247873700 socket as follows. Insert the R-W into position 1, the W-BK wire into
position 2, and the BL wire into position 3. Terminate the other end of the 3 wires
with the 245381600 pins and insert into the 247873800 plug as follows. Insert the
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-103
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
R-W into position 1, the W-BK wire into position 2, and the BL wire into position 3.
This jumper can be inserted on the end of the 421815800 jumper.)
On the 541131 jumper, insert the 25 pin connector into J1 of 509532 Circuit Card
located at the bottom of the Distribution Cabinet in the 582126000 System, and
secure slide latch.
On the 541131 jumper, attach the fused R-W wire to BATTERY and the W-BK wire to
RTN BATTERY using 1/4-20 hardware (not provided). The R-W wire is protected
with a 3A in line fuse.
On the 541131 jumper, the yellow wire can be used to connect an external FA alarm
to the MCA. Attach and crimp an external FA lead to the yellow wire butt splice as
required.
Switch S1
Position
Shunt
Capacity
Switch S1
Position
Shunt
Capacity
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
100A
200A
300A
400A
500A
600A
800A
1000A
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
1200A
1600A
2000A
3000A
4000A
5000A
8000A
10000A
Table 4-5A
Shunt POD Circuit Card
50mV Shunt Capacity Selection Switch S1 Settings
Switch S1
Position
Shunt
Capacity
Switch S1
Position
Shunt
Capacity
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
50A
100A
150A
200A
250A
300A
400A
500A
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
600A
800A
1000A
1500A
2000A
2500A
4000A
5000A
Table 4-5B
Shunt POD Circuit Card
25mV Shunt Capacity Selection Switch S1 Settings
Page 4-104
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
-Shunt
+Shunt
To Remote Shunt
Black
Red
J1
421815700
Jumper
Shunt Monitoring
Circuit Card (POD)
433800164
421815800
Jumper
FA
Y
541131
Jumper
3A
Connect to
25-Pin Connector J1
of 509532 Circuit Card
located at the bottom
of the Distribution Cabinet
in the 582126000 System
W-BK
RTN
BAT
R-W
BAT
Figure 4-29
External Shunt Monitoring Kit P/N 541134
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
Page 4-105
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
Page 4-106
Chapter 4. Making Electrical Connections
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
CHAPTER 5
INSTALLING RECTIFIER MODULES
AND INITIALLY STARTING THE SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Installing the Rectifier Modules ....................................................................................... 5-2
Installing the Converter Modules in List 63 and 64 (if furnished) ................................... 5-4
Initially Starting, Configuring, and Checking System Operation...................................... 5-5
Admonishment .......................................................................................................... 5-5
Controls and Indicators ............................................................................................. 5-5
Pre-Charging Load Capacitors ................................................................................. 5-7
Initial Startup Preparation ......................................................................................... 5-7
Initially Starting the System....................................................................................... 5-7
MCA Initialization ...................................................................................................... 5-8
Initially Connecting Low Voltage Disconnect Circuits (if furnished)........................ 5-16
Configuring the System........................................................................................... 5-16
Setting Up the MCA Ethernet Option TCP/IP (and SNMP if required)
Parameters (Lists 75, 76, 77, and 78 Only) ............................................................ 5-20
Checking Meter Operation ...................................................................................... 5-28
Checking Adjustment and Calibration Values......................................................... 5-30
Checking MCA Audible Alarm and Audible Alarm Cutoff (if available)................... 5-30
Checking Manual Test/Equalize and Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize ....... 5-31
Checking Remote Test/Equalize............................................................................. 5-34
Checking Remote High Voltage Shutdown............................................................. 5-34
Checking Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect ................................. 5-34
Checking Remote On/Off (TR) (if RS-485 Interface is installed) ............................ 5-35
Checking AC Fail Alarm and Rectifier Module Fail Alarm ...................................... 5-35
Checking Fuse Alarm/Circuit Breaker Alarm .......................................................... 5-36
Checking System High Voltage Alarm 1................................................................. 5-39
Checking System High Voltage Alarm 2................................................................. 5-40
Checking System Battery On Discharge Alarm ...................................................... 5-42
Checking System 50% Battery On Discharge (Very Low Voltage) Alarm .............. 5-43
Checking System Current Alarm............................................................................. 5-44
Checking Subsystem (if connected) High Voltage Alarm ....................................... 5-46
Checking Subsystem (if connected) Low Voltage Alarm ........................................ 5-47
Checking Subsystem (if connected) Current Alarm................................................ 5-49
Checking Low Voltage Disconnect (if furnished) .................................................... 5-50
Checking System Status......................................................................................... 5-57
Final Step ................................................................................................................ 5-57
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INSTALLING THE RECTIFIER MODULES
Rectifier Modules can be inserted or removed with power applied (hot swappable).
Note: The Rectifier Module locks into the Rectifier Module Mounting Shelf through a
latch located on the underside of the Rectifier Module. The latch and Rectifier
Module handle are interactive. Push the handle into the Rectifier Module’s front
panel, and the latch will pop out from the Rectifier Module bottom. Click the
handle to pop it out from the Rectifier Module’s front panel, and the latch will
retract back into the Rectifier Module. The latch mechanism is shown in Figure
5-1.
Warning: To prevent damage to the latching mechanism, ensure the handle is in
the open position when installing or removing a module. NEVER hold
the handle in the closed position when installing a module into a shelf.
Note: 588705000 List 3 Rectifier Mounting Shelves Only (3-Phase Input): One
three-phase input feeds the three Rectifier Modules on the left-hand side of the
shelf. The second three-phase input feeds the modules on the right-hand side. To
maintain phase balance, install Rectifier Modules in groups of three; that is, fill all
three mounting positions on the left and/or all three on the right.
Latch
Handle
Figure 5-1
Handle/Latch Mechanism on the Rectifier Module
Procedure
1) Remove blank cover panels from the mounting positions into which Rectifier
Modules are to be installed.
Page 5-2
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
2) Place the Rectifier Module into an unoccupied mounting slot without sliding it in
completely.
3) Click the Rectifier Module handle in order to pop it forwards out of the Rectifier
Module’s front panel (this will also retract the latch mechanism located on the
underside of the Rectifier Module).
4) Now push the Rectifier Module completely into the shelf.
5) Push the handle into the front panel of the Rectifier Module. This will make the
latch lock the Rectifier Module securely to the shelf.
6) Repeat the above steps for each Rectifier Module being installed in the system.
7) After the Rectifier Modules are physically installed in the mounting shelf(s), they
are ready for operation immediately after power is supplied to them.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INSTALLING THE CONVERTER MODULES IN LIST 63 AND 64
(IF FURNISHED)
Note: This task only applies if system is equipped with List 63 / List 64 Converter
Mounting Shelf.
Warning: Each Converter Module contains static-sensitive devices. Read the
Static Statement at the front of this manual before performing this
procedure.
Procedure
Note: If installing less than eight Converter Modules, be aware that the modules in
Mounting Positions 3 and 7 must be removed if the alarm circuit card assembly
should require replacement. See Figure 5-2B.
1) If not already done, remove blank modules from any mounting position into which
a Converter Module is to be installed.
2) Ensure that the ON/STANDBY switch on the each Converter Module is in the
STANDBY (
) position.
3) Slide each Converter Module into a mounting position in the shelf. Secure by
tightening the captive fastener located on the front panel.
4) Ensure that all mounting positions are occupied, by either a Converter Module or
a blank module.
MODULE
POSITION
1
MODULE
POSITION
2
MODULE
POSITION
3
MODULE
POSITION
4
MODULE
POSITION
5
MODULE
POSITION
6
MODULE
POSITION
7
MODULE
POSITION
8
ALARM
CIRCUIT
CARD
ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
MODULES IN
POSITIONS 3 AND 7 MUST
BE REMOVED TO
REPLACE ALARM CIRCUIT
CARD ASSEMBLY.
Figure 5-2
Converter Module Mounting Positions in List 63 and 64
Page 5-4
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
INITIALLY STARTING, CONFIGURING,
AND CHECKING SYSTEM OPERATION
Admonishment
Caution: Performing various steps in the following procedures may cause a
service interruption and/or result in the extension of alarms. Notify any
appropriate personnel before starting these procedures. Also, notify
personnel when these procedures are completed.
Controls and Indicators
In the following procedures, all controls and indicators are located on the MCA Local
Interface Pad, unless otherwise stated. Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating
Procedures of the separate User Instructions (Section 5975) for controls and indicators
locations and descriptions. Section 5975 can be accessed from the CD (Electronic
Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
The MCA Local Interface Pad is located on the front of the Main Bay Distribution Cabinet.
Refer to Figure 5-2.
FUNCTION
SELECT
ALARM CUTOFF
FUNCTION
SET
YES
MAJOR MINOR
AC
TEST
EQ
DISPLAY
ENTER
NO
Figure 5-3
MCA Local Interface Pad and Display
Navigating the MCA
Section 6022 provides a color MCA Menu Tree. Section 6022 is located in the separate
INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER MANUAL. It is also provided on the CD
(Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Navigating the MCA is an easy process. You just have to remember a few key
combinations (as shown in the following chart).
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-5
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
TASK
KEY OR KEY COMBINATIONS
FUNCTION
SET
At any level in the MCA menus,
pressing YES and NO simultaneously
takes you back to the beginning of the
MCA menu tree.
YES
Getting to Home Position
NO
You can travel left to right from one
menu to another by pressing ENTER.
You can also go back to a specified
menu by pressing ENTER while the
menu's name is being displayed.
FUNCTION
SET
Moving from One Menu
to Another Menu
ENTER
Press Up Arrow to move up the list of
available entries in the active menu.
Press Down Arrow to move down the
list of available entries in the active
menu.
FUNCTION
SELECT
Moving Within a Menu
Changing a Value or Setting
Entering the
Adjustment/Change
Setting Mode
NOTES
FUNCTION
SET
ALARM
CUTOFF
ENTER
FUNCTION
SET
Changing the
Value or Setting
Changing a value or setting requires
four (4) steps.
1.
With the current value or setting
being displayed, simultaneously
press ENTER and ALARM
CUTOFF.
2.
To increase the value or change
the setting, press YES. To
decrease the value or change the
setting, press NO.
3.
With the correct value or setting
being displayed, press ENTER.
4.
To accept the change, at the
"ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press
YES. To reject the change, at the
"ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press
NO.
YES
NO
FUNCTION
SET
Locking the Change
ENTER
FUNCTION
SET
YES
Confirming the Change
NO
Changing a Control Function
Entering the
Adjustment/Change
Setting Mode
FUNCTION
SET
ALARM
CUTOFF
ENTER
FUNCTION
SET
Confirming the Change
YES
NO
Page 5-6
Changing a control function requires
two (2) steps.
1.
With the control function menu
item being displayed,
simultaneously press ENTER and
ALARM CUTOFF.
2.
To accept the change, at the
"ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press
the YES. To reject the change,
at the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt
press NO.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Pre-Charging Load Capacitors
When required, use the List 79 Capacitor Precharge Assembly to initially charge DC load
capacitors prior to closing the respective distribution circuit breaker or installing a
distribution fuse. A clip cord is provided for connecting to the GJ/218-type circuit breaker
or TPH-type fuseholder terminals. For operating information, refer to the Precharge
Assembly's Instructions (Section 5823). Section 5823 can be found in the separate
INSTALLATION MANUAL, and on the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished
with your system.
Initial Startup Preparation

Ensure that all blocks for Chapters 2 through 4 in the Installation Acceptance
Checklist, located in Chapter 1, have been checked.

Ensure that a Bypass Circuit Card (P/N 117086) is installed in every unused Quad
Shunt POD Circuit Card or Quad Low Voltage Disconnect Circuit Card Mounting
Position in every Distribution Cabinet in the Power System.

Ensure that all Rectifier Module mounting positions are filled, either by a Rectifier
Module or a blank cover panel.

If Converter Modules are provided, ensure that the Standby/Operate switch on each
Converter Module is placed to the "standby" position.
Initially Starting the System
Procedure
Note: Before system (MCA) startup, be prepared to view the MCA Display.
Different user actions are required depending on what is displayed.
1) Apply DC input power to the system by closing the external DC disconnect(s) or
protective device(s) that supplies battery power to the system. Observe and
record the MCA Configuration Spec. No. briefly displayed as the MCA starts.
Note the possible MCA Configuration Spec. Nos. for your power system in the
following table.
Power System List No.
Configuration No.
10
11
12
13
534876
534877
534878
534879
2) Apply AC input power to the system by closing the external AC disconnects or
protective devices that supply AC power to the Rectifier Module Mounting
Shelves. Rectifier Modules automatically start.
3) If Converter Modules are provided, place the ON/STANDBY switch on each
Converter Module to the ON ( I ) position.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-7
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
4) Open the Distribution Cabinet(s) front door by turning and holding the captive
fastener in the counterclockwise position.
5) If List RB, RC, or RD (manual battery disconnect) is furnished, place the
BATTERY DISCONNECT switch in the NORM position.
6) Place each distribution circuit breaker (if furnished) to the ON position.
MCA Initialization
Whenever a system is initially started (or the MCA has been replaced), the MCA
performs an initialization routine, as detailed here. During this period "INITIALIZING..." is
displayed along with the maximum remaining initialization time in seconds.
Note: During MCA startup, one of three scenarios may occur. Be prepared to view the
MCA Display. Different user actions are required depending on which scenario
occurs.
Scenario One: On initial MCA startup, the display will briefly show the proper
value for the MCA Configuration Spec. No. and System Voltage for two seconds,
then continue on.
Scenario Two: On initial MCA startup, the display will immediately pause at
"MUST SET SPEC NO.".
Scenario Three: On initial MCA startup, the display will briefly show an MCA
Configuration Spec. No. and System Voltage for two seconds other than the
proper value, then continue on.
Note: After power-up, you can also view the MCA Configuration Spec. No. Refer to Line
Item "Spec. No." in the MCA INVENTORY MENU. Another option if you miss the
displayed MCA Configuration Spec. No., is to simply remove and reapply MCA
input power to restart the MCA initialization process.
PROCEDURE 1
(THE PROPER MCA CONFIGURATION SPEC. NO.
AND SYSTEM VOLTAGE WAS BRIEFLY DISPLAYED)
Perform one of the following steps, as determined by what is being displayed.
"SET ##V DEFAULTS" Displayed
Description: If the MCA detects that it is configured for proper voltage operation
consistent with the Rectifier Modules (e.g. set for 48V operation and 48V Rectifier
Modules detected), the MCA then compares the output capacities (amps) and serial
numbers of all Rectifier Modules with what it has stored in memory. If any Rectifier
Module capacity does not match the value stored or if none of the serial numbers match,
the MCA displays "SET ##V DEFAULTS".
Note: If this system was factory set with customer specified settings that are different
than the defaults listed in the System Application Guide (SAG), do not reset all
stored variables to factory defaults. Instead, see "To Start the System with the
MCA's Existing Setpoints Procedure:".
Page 5-8
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
To Reset all Stored Variables to Factory Defaults Procedure:
1) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
2) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton.
3) The MCA displays "INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining
initialization time in seconds while it is resetting the variables, followed by
"CHECK SETPOINTS".
4) As you press the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons, each
value listed later in this procedure under "CHECK SETPOINTS ADJUSTABLE
VALUES" is displayed. Determine if the value displayed is correct for your
installation, change the value as required.
a) To change the setting of the currently displayed entry, press and release the
ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
b) The portion of the display before the equal sign (=) flashes.
c) Use the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton to increase or
decrease, respectively, the setting.
d) Press the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
e) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton to store the new value, or the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton
to cancel this operation without changing the setting.
f)
Display the next or previous entry using the FUNCTION SELECT UP or
DOWN arrow pushbutton.
g) Repeat this procedure for each entry presented.
5) When all the adjustable values have been properly set, press the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "START THE SYSTEM" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
7) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton.
8) The MCA briefly displays " INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining
initialization time in seconds while it is starting the system.
To Start the System with the MCA's Existing Setpoints Procedure:
1) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
2) At the "ARE YOU SURE? + -" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET NO (-)
pushbutton.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-9
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
3) The MCA displays "CHECK SETPOINTS" during and after system startup. Press
the FUNCTION SELECT UP or DOWN pushbutton to move to the "System
Adjustment Menu". Check each setting for your installation, change as
required.
"MUST SET SYS=##V" Displayed
Description: If the MCA detects that it is configured for voltage operation not consistent
with the Rectifier Modules (e.g. set for 24V operation and 48V Rectifier Modules
detected, or set for 48V operation and 24V Rectifier Modules are detected), the MCA
displays "MUST SET SYS=##V".
Procedure:
1) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
2) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton.
3) The MCA displays "INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining
initialization time in seconds while it reconfigures itself for proper voltage
operation, and then displays "CHECK SETPOINTS".
4) As you press the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons, each
value listed later in this procedure under "CHECK SETPOINTS ADJUSTABLE
VALUES" is displayed. Determine if the value displayed is correct for the
application.
a) To change the setting of the currently displayed entry, press and release the
ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
b) The portion of the display before the equal sign (=) flashes.
c) Use the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton to increase or
decrease, respectively, the setting.
d) Press the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
e) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton to store the new value, or the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton
to cancel this operation without changing the setting.
f)
Display the next or previous entry using the FUNCTION SELECT UP or
DOWN arrow pushbutton.
g) Repeat this procedure for each entry presented.
5) When all the adjustable values have been properly set, press the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "START THE SYSTEM" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
Page 5-10
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
7) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton.
8) The MCA briefly displays " INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining
initialization time in seconds while it is starting the system.
"CHECK SETPOINTS" Displayed
Description: If some serial numbers match, MCA starts the system using the MCA's
existing setpoints. The MCA displays "CHECK SETPOINTS" during and after system
startup.
Procedure:
1) Press the FUNCTION SELECT UP or DOWN pushbutton to move to the "System
Adjustment Menu". Check all MCA settings.
"SYSTEM OK" or "## ALARMS ACTIVE" Displayed
Description: If all serial numbers match, the MCA starts the system using its existing
setpoints. After the system is started, the MCA displays "SYSTEM OK" or "## ALARMS
ACTIVE".
Procedure:
1) Go to the "System Adjustment Menu", and check all MCA settings.
PROCEDURE 2
(MCA DISPLAYS "MUST SET SPEC NO.")
1) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons
until the proper MCA Configuration Spec. No. and System Voltage are shown.
Note: Selecting an MCA Configuration Spec. No. or System Voltage different
from your system's original will alter system performance, and is not
recommended. Refer to the System Application Guide (SAG) to
determine the proper MCA Configuration (Spec. No.) and system voltage.
2) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
3) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton.
4) The MCA displays “CHANGING SPEC” then "INITIALIZING..." along with the
maximum remaining initialization time in seconds while it reconfigures itself for
proper operation, and then displays "CHECK SETPOINTS".
5) As you press the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons, each
value listed later in this procedure under "CHECK SETPOINTS ADJUSTABLE
VALUES" is displayed. Determine if the value displayed is correct for the
application.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-11
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
a) To change the setting of the currently displayed entry, press and release the
ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
b) The portion of the display before the equal sign (=) flashes.
c) Use the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton to increase or
decrease, respectively, the setting.
d) Press the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
e) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton to store the new value, or the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton
to cancel this operation without changing the setting.
f)
Display the next or previous entry using the FUNCTION SELECT UP or
DOWN arrow pushbutton.
g) Repeat this procedure for each entry presented.
6) When all the adjustable values have been properly set, press the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "START THE SYSTEM" is displayed.
7) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
8) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton.
9) The MCA briefly displays "INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining
initialization time in seconds while it is starting the system.
PROCEDURE 3
(AN MCA CONFIGURATION SPEC. NO. AND SYSTEM VOLTAGE
OTHER THAN THE PROPER VALUE WAS BRIEFLY DISPLAYED)
1) Immediately depress and hold the ALARM CUTOFF, FUNCTION SELECT UP,
and FUNCTION SELECT DOWN pushbuttons at the same time while the display
is showing the MCA "SPEC" number and then the "MCA SW ##.##.## " version
number. Only after the "MCA SW ##.##.##" version number goes off, release
the three buttons.
"SET ###### @ ##V" should appear.
Note: The pushbuttons must be depressed before "INITIALIZING ##" appears
on the display. Remove and re-apply MCA input power to restart this
step, if necessary.
2) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons
until the proper MCA Configuration Spec. No. and System Voltage are shown.
Page 5-12
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Note: Selecting an MCA Configuration Spec. No. or System Voltage different
from your system's original will alter system performance, and is not
recommended. Refer to the System Application Guide (SAG) to
determine the proper MCA Configuration (Spec. No.) and system voltage.
3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
4) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton.
5) The MCA displays “CHANGING SPEC” then "INITIALIZING..." along with the
maximum remaining initialization time in seconds while it reconfigures itself for
proper operation, and then displays "CHECK SETPOINTS".
6) As you press the FUNCTION SELECT UP and DOWN arrow pushbuttons, each
value listed later in this procedure under "CHECK SETPOINTS ADJUSTABLE
VALUES" is displayed. Determine if the value displayed is correct for the
application.
a) To change the setting of the currently displayed entry, press and release the
ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
b) The portion of the display before the equal sign (=) flashes.
c) Use the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton to increase or
decrease, respectively, the setting.
d) Press the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
e) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton to store the new value, or the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton
to cancel this operation without changing the setting.
f)
Display the next or previous entry using the FUNCTION SELECT UP or
DOWN arrow pushbutton.
g) Repeat this procedure for each entry presented.
7) When all the adjustable values have been properly set, press the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "START THE SYSTEM" is displayed.
8) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
9) At the "ARE YOU SURE? +-" prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton.
10) The MCA briefly displays "INITIALIZING..." along with the maximum remaining
initialization time in seconds while it is starting the system.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-13
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
CHECK SETPOINTS ADJUSTABLE VALUES
1) FLOAT = ##.##V
##.##V = float voltage setting for all Rectifier
Modules
2) TEST/EQ = ##.##V
##.##V = test equalize voltage setting for all Rectifier
Modules
3) SET HVS = ##.##V
##.##V = high voltage shutdown setting for all
Rectifier Modules
4) CURRLIM = #####A
#####A = system current limit setting, current limit
circuit on all Rectifier Modules are automatically
adjusted to ensure system current does not exceed
this value
CURRLIM = #####MAX
#####MAX = the sum of the maximum capabilities of
all Rectifier Modules installed in the system
5) SYS HV1 = ##.##V
##.##V = system high voltage alarm 1 setting
6) SYS HV2 = ##.##V
##.##V = system high voltage alarm 2 setting
7) SYS BOD = ##.##V
##.##V = system battery on discharge alarm setting
8) SYS 50% (VERYLOVOLT) = ##.##V
##.##V = system 50% battery on
discharge (very low voltage) alarm
setting
9) SYSCURR = #####A
####A = system current alarm setting
10) SUB HV = ##.##V
##.##V = subsystem high voltage alarm setting
11) SUB LV = ##.##V
##.##V = subsystem low voltage alarm setting
12) SUBCURR = #####A
####A = subsystem current alarm setting
13) LVD ** = ##.#V
LVD** = number assigned to the low voltage
disconnect circuit detected, each low voltage
disconnect circuit detected in the system is
displayed separately
##.#V = respective low voltage disconnect circuit
"disconnect" setting
14) LV RECON = ##.#V
MANUAL RECONNECT
Page 5-14
##.#V = reconnect setting for all low voltage
disconnect circuits detected, or manual reconnect
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
15) TC CAL = ##.##V
ANALOG TC OFF
TempCmp Hardware
##.##V = calibration voltage value written on
battery charge temperature
compensation module, or off
16) DIGITAL TC OFF
SLOPE = .###V/ºC
TempCmp Hardware
digital temperature compensation off, or
slope parameter setting
17) MAX W/T = ##.##V
##.##V = maximum voltage with temperature
compensation setting
18) MIN W/T = ##.##V
##.##V = minimum voltage with temperature
compensation setting
19) HI TEMP 1 = ###ºC
HI TEMP 1 IS OFF
###ºC = high temperature 1 alarm setting, or
high temperature 1 alarm off
(if TXM installed, each temperature probe has an
associated alarm)
20) LO TEMP 1 = ###ºC
LO TEMP 1 IS OFF
###ºC = low temperature 1 alarm setting, or
low temperature 1 alarm off
(if TXM installed, each temperature probe has an
associated alarm)
21) ****A PLACES = ##
****A = amperage of each type of Rectifier Module,
each type of Rectifier Module is displayed separately
## = number of total (filled and empty) shelf
positions available for this amperage Rectifier
Module
22) START THE SYSTEM
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and
FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously. At the "ARE YOU SURE? + -"
prompt, press the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton to start system.
Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton to go
back and change more setpoints before starting the
system. Use the FUNCTION SELECT UP and
DOWN arrow pushbuttons to scroll through the list of
adjustable values as previously described.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-15
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Initially Connecting Low Voltage Disconnect Circuits (if furnished)
If the low voltage disconnect circuit(s) (if furnished) is set for manual reconnect, the
battery and system output have to be initially connected to the controlled load(s).
(Battery voltage must be above the upper setting of the low voltage disconnect circuit.) If
there are active low voltage disconnect alarms, perform the following procedure to initially
connect battery and system output to the controlled load(s).
Procedure
1) With "## ALARMS ACTIVE" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press
and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ALARM LVD ACTIVE".
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until the low voltage disconnect circuit to be reconnected is displayed
("RECONNECT LVD**", **=the designation of the low voltage disconnect circuit).
5) To reconnect the low voltage disconnect circuit being displayed, press and
release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously.
6) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton. The low voltage disconnect circuit reconnects.
7) If the system contains additional low voltage disconnect circuits, separately
reconnect these by repeating steps 5) through 6).
8) When done, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-)
pushbuttons simultaneously. You are returned to the beginning of the MCA
menu tree.
Configuring the System
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) If the MCA Initialization procedure was performed, go to step 14). If not (or if you
want to verify the inventory), proceed with step 5).
5) "VERIFY INVENTORY" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton.
Page 5-16
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "VACANT ****A = ##" is displayed. (****A is the amperage of
the Rectifier Module)
7) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. "****A PLACES = ##" is displayed, ****A is the
amperage of the Rectifier Module. Portion of the display flashes.
8) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton until the value
displayed equals the total (filled and empty) number of available mounting
positions in the system for this amperage of Rectifier Module, then release the
pushbutton.
9) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
10) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
11) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"VACANT ****A = ##". Repeat steps 7) through 10) for any other amperage
Rectifier Modules available positions.
12) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
13) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
14) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until
"SHARE ALARM OFF" or "SHARE ALARM ON" is displayed. This is the current
setting for this feature. To toggle this setting, perform steps 15) and 16). To
keep this setting, proceed with step 17).
15) To toggle this setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION
SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
16) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until
"EMERG STOP ON" or " EMERG STOP OFF" is displayed. This is the current
setting for this feature. To toggle this setting, perform steps 18) and 19). To
keep this setting, proceed with step 20).
18) To toggle this setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION
SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
19) "ARE YOU SURE? +_" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
20) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until " REMOTE HVS ON" or " REMOTE HVS OFF SEE USER
MANUAL" is displayed. This is the current setting for this feature. To toggle this
setting, perform steps 21) through 22). To keep this setting, proceed with step
23).
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-17
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
21) To toggle this setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION
SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
22) "ARE YOU SURE? +_" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
23) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "DISPLAY ROLL OFF" or "DISPLAY ROLL ON" is displayed.
This is the current setting for this feature. To toggle this setting, perform steps
24) and 25). To keep this setting, proceed with step 26).
Note: For Initial Startup and Checkout, "DISPLAY ROLL OFF" is preferred.
24) To toggle this setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION
SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
25) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
26) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "LO SPEED FAN OFF" or "LO SPEED FAN ON" is displayed.
This is the current setting for this feature. To toggle this setting, perform steps
27) and 28). To keep this setting, proceed with step 29) or 34).
27) To toggle this setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION
SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
28) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
Note: Do not perform steps 29) through 34) if the system is not equipped with
external MCA Audible Alarm relay contacts.
29) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"NAG MINUTES = ##" or "AUDIBLE NAG OFF".
30) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "NAG MINUTES =" portion of the display
flashes.
31) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton until the value
displayed equals the desired MCA audible alarm cutoff reset time period or
"AUDIBLE NAG OFF", then release the pushbutton.
32) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
33) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
34) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"TEST/EQ HRS = ##".
35) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ HRS =" portion of the display
flashes.
Page 5-18
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
36) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton until the value
displayed equals the desired timed test/equalize period.
Note: To disable the manually initiated timed test/equalize feature, press the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value goes above 99.
"TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is then displayed.
37) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
38) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
39) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"AUTO EQ MUL = ##" or "AUTO EQ DISABLED".
Note: For Initial Startup and Checkout, "AUTO EQ DISABLED" is preferred.
Note: If "AUTO EQ MUL = ##" is displayed, the system is already set for
Automatic Equalize. In this case, you can proceed with steps 40) through
43) to change the current setting, or proceed with step 44) if no changes
are required.
Note: If "END AUTO ##.##HR" is displayed, the system is already set for
Automatic Equalize, and an Automatic Equalize is in progress. In this
case, you can proceed with steps 40) through 43) to cancel the Automatic
Equalize in progress and change the current setting, or proceed with step
44) to proceed with the Automatic Equalize in progress and make no
changes.
40) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "AUTO EQ MUL =" portion of the display
flashes.
41) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton until the desired value
is displayed, then release the pushbutton. Note that as you scroll below 1,
"AUTO EQ DISABLED" is displayed. Scroll back up to redisplay "AUTO EQ MUL
=".
42) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
43) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
44) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"RELAYTEST = ###SEC".
45) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "RELAYTEST =" portion of the display flashes.
46) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton until the value
displayed equals the desired timed period for the Alarm Relay Test feature.
47) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-19
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
48) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
49) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Setting Up the MCA Ethernet Option
TCP/IP (and SNMP if required) Parameters
(Lists 75, 76, 77, and 78 Only)
TCP/IP PARAMETERS
Three settings are required to allow the MCA to communicate on your TCP/IP network.
These are…
IP Address
(_____________________) record here
IP Netmask
(_____________________) record here
IP Gateway
(_____________________) record here
These parameters are typically assigned by your Information Technology (IT)
department. It is advisable to request this information at the beginning of the installation
to give your IT department time to fill your request. Once the above IP addresses are
received, record them on this document and perform the appropriate procedure below.
Power System's TCP/IP Network Address (IP Address)
In the format of nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where 0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.
An IP address is a unique identifying number that your computer uses during its time on
the internet. Traffic coming from you or going to you is routed based on your IP address,
which identifies the unique machine you are on and its place in the internet. For
instance, 198.147.241.20 is the IP address of host whitehouse.gov. All packets on the
internet destined for whitehouse.gov are sent to this IP address by the Domain Name
Service. All traffic coming from this host is identified as such because the packets
contain the originating IP address in the packet headers. All routing and traffic on the
internet ultimately depends on IP addresses.
Power System's TCP/IP Netmask Address (IP Netmask)
In the format of nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where 0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.
A netmask is a series of bits designed to 'mask' certain portions of an IP address. The
standard netmask for a class C network like FlashNet is 255.255.255.0 - basically the last
octet, .0, says 'look here for the machine number, the rest (255) is network number'. The
primary use for netmasks is in subnetting.
Power System's TCP/IP Gateway Address (IP Gateway)
In the format of nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where 0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.
A gateway is a computer that lies at the intersection of two networks and routes traffic
correctly between them, while keeping traffic internal to the two networks separated. A
gateway, such as a Cisco router, lies at the border between network1.net and
network2.net. It correctly routes traffic bound for the internet out to its destination, while
keeping traffic meant for within network1 on the network1.net side of the router and traffic
for network2 on the network2.net side.
Page 5-20
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
SNMP PARAMETERS
Additional parameters are set per site requirements for SNMP support.
"Community String"
String of alpha/numeric characters.
An SNMP community is a relationship between an SNMP agent and a set of SNMP
managers that defines authentication, access control, and proxy characteristics. The
community concept is a local one, defined at the managed system. The managed
system establishes one community for each desired combination of authentication,
access control, and proxy characteristics. Each community is given a community name,
and the management stations.
The GET community name to authenticate GET, GETNEXT, and GETBULK requests.
Note: In this application, only the GET community name can be set.
"Trap Addresses"
In the format of nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where 0 ≤ nnn ≤ 255.
A list of IP addresses to which SNMP Traps will be sent. The machine with this IP
address must have appropriate SNMP browser running. SNMP Traps V2 are sent.
PROCEDURE
This procedure is for setting the MCA Ethernet card’s IP parameters via the Web
Interface. If your Ethernet card was ordered with the SNMP option, steps for setting
SNMP parameters are included. It requires that you temporarily change the IP setup on
your computer (PC).
Note: Windows 98 or later required to setup network connection.
This procedure requires a Permission Level of 8. The factory default user name and
password provide Level 8 access. (For information about Permission Levels, see the
separate Ethernet Card Web Interface User instructions, Section 5982).
Step 1: Record your PC's Network Settings
Record your current network settings for the computer you will be using to set the
MCA Ethernet card's IP parameters. You will use these values in step 4.
Step 2: Change your PC's Network Settings
Change your computer's IP parameters to talk to the MCA Ethernet Card using
the card's default parameters.
a) 192.168.1.1, set your computer to 192.168.1.2 (IP Address).
b) 255.255.255.0, set your computer to the same (Subnet Mask).
c) 192.168.1.1, set your computer to the same (Gateway).
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-21
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Step 3: Change the MCA Ethernet Card's Network Settings
Connect the MCA Ethernet card into your company's network. Use Internet
Explorer to change the MCA Ethernet card’s default IP parameters to the
parameters issued by your IT department.
If your PC cannot access the MCA Ethernet card, it may be necessary to bypass
your company network by using a "crossover" cable connected directly between
your PC and the MCA Ethernet Card.
Step 4: Reset your PC's Network Settings
Reset your computer's IP parameters back to their original values noted in step
1. If using a crossover cable, first reconnect your computer to your company's
network and connect the MCA Ethernet card to your company's network.
Step 5: Change the MCA Ethernet Card's SNMP Settings
(if equipped with SNMP option)
Log onto the MCA Ethernet card. Open the SNMP settings page. Change
SNMP settings and trap settings as required.
Step 6: Access the Power Plant over the Company Network
Via WinLink: Talk to the MCA Ethernet card over your company’s network using
WinLink. Install WinLink, create an MCA entry, select the MCA and click on the
“Connect to MCA” toolbar button.
Via Web Browser: Open your Web browser. Type in the unit’s IP address.
Enter user name and password in the logon window, and logon.
Expanded Procedure
Step 1: Record your PC's Network Settings
1) Open the Control Panel on your computer.
2) Select Network Connections.
3) Select Local Area Connection.
4) Select Properties.
5) Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
6) Select Properties.
7) Record the current settings, these may be specific parameters or your computer
may be set to automatically obtain these parameters from your company's
network.
Obtained IP Address Automatically
or
Use the following…
IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
Default Gateway:
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
8) Select Cancel.
Page 5-22
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Step 2: Change your PC's Network Settings
1) Open the Control Panel on your computer.
2) Select Network Connections.
3) Select Local Area Connection.
4) Select Properties.
5) Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
6) Select Properties.
7) Select "Use the following IP Address".
8) Enter the following.
a) 192.168.1.2, as the IP Address.
b) 255.255.255.0, as the Subnet Mask.
c) 192.168.1.1, as the default Gateway.
9) Select OK. Note that you may have to reboot your computer for the settings to
take effect. Follow any instructions you see on the screen.
Step 3: Change the MCA Ethernet Card's Network Settings
1) Connect the MCA Ethernet card's port to your company's network.
2) Power up the MCA, if not already powered.
3) Open your Web Browser. Type 192.168.1.1 in the Address box. Press Enter.
The logon window opens.
You may have to change Internet Explorer options to do this. Go to
Tools/Internet Options/LAN Settings, then temporarily disable the proxy server.
Another option is to select Bypass Proxy Server for local addresses and add
192.168.* under Advanced.
If your PC cannot access the Logon window, it may be necessary to bypass your
company network by using a "cross-over" cable connected directly between your
PC and the MCA Ethernet card. Repeat this step if necessary.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-23
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
4) Type the default user name and password, then press Enter.
User Name: llp_admin
Password: llp_admin
Note: The user name and password are case-sensitive. For security, the
password is not displayed on the computer’s screen. You have three
attempts to enter a valid user name and password. If both are not
entered correctly after three attempts, the browser is redirected to a
“Protected Object” message page. A link is provided on that page that
will return you to the logon window.
5) If a valid user name and password are entered, the System Status page opens.
6) On the toolbar near the top of the System Status web page, select
ConfigureSystemNetwork Settings. The Network Settings page opens.
Page 5-24
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
7) Enter the parameters issued by your IT department. When the required IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway have been entered, click the Set IP
Address button. VERIFY WHAT YOU HAVE TYPED, IF IT IS ENTERED
INCORRECTLY YOU MAY NOT BE ABLE TO COMMUNICATED WITH THE
MCA ETHERNET CARD.
Note:
If a new value is unacceptable, an “Invalid Entry” message is displayed.
8) On the toolbar, select ConfigureSystemReset VEC. The Reset VEC page
opens.
9) Click the Reset VEC button. Close your Web Browser.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-25
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Step 4: Reset your PC's Network Settings
1) If you were using a crossover cable, reconnect your computer to your company's
network and connect the MCA Ethernet card’s port to your company's network.
2) Open the Control Panel on your computer.
3) Select Network Connections.
4) Select Local Area Connection.
5) Select Properties.
6) Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
7) Select Properties.
8) Set the IP parameters to the original settings recorded at the beginning of this
procedure.
9) Check the new address settings by opening your Web Browser and entering the
new IP address.
Page 5-26
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Step 5: Change the MCA Ethernet Card's SNMP Settings
(if equipped with SNMP option)
1) Open your Web Browser. Type the unit’s IP address in the Address box. Press
Enter. The logon window opens.
2) Type the default user name and password, then press Enter.
User Name: llp_admin
Password: llp_admin
Note: The user name and password are case-sensitive. For security, the
password is not displayed on the computer’s screen. You have three
attempts to enter a valid user name and password. If both are not
entered correctly after three attempts, the browser is redirected to a
“Protected Object” message page. A link is provided on that page that
will return you to the logon window.
3) If a valid user name and password are entered, the System Status page opens.
4) On the toolbar near the top of the System Status web page, select
ConfigureSNMPSNMP Settings. The SNMP Settings page opens.
5) Enter the SNMP Settings and click the Update Settings button. The screen
refreshes and the new settings take effect.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-27
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
6) Add and/or delete traps as necessary. To add, type the Trap Address in Trap
box and then press Add Trap Address. To delete, select the Trap Address from
the Trap List and then press Delete Trap Address.
Step 6: Access the Power Plant over the Company Network
Via WinLink:
1) Add a new MCA in WinLink.
2) Set the TCP/IP parameters for this entry.
Set the IP address to the address issued by your IT department.
Set the Port to 2001.
3) You can now communicate with the power system over you company’s network.
Via Web Browser:
1) With your Web browser open, type in the unit’s IP address.
2) Enter a valid user name and password in the logon window, and logon.
3) You can now communicate with the power system over you company’s network.
Checking Meter Operation
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) "MEASUREMENT MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton.
a) Requirement: System output voltage is displayed ("SYSTEM ##.##VDC").
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"SYS LOAD ####A".
a) Requirement: Total system load current is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
a) Requirement: Load current through the first system load shunt is displayed
("SYS LOAD** ####A").
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton to display individual load currents through the remaining system load
shunts (if furnished and connected to the MCA).
a) Requirement: As the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton is
pressed and released, load currents through the remaining system load
shunts are displayed. When all system shunts are cycled through,
"MEASUREMENT MENU" is displayed.
Page 5-28
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
6) If "MEASUREMENT MENU" is not displayed, repeatedly press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until it is.
7) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
8) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until “PCU
LOAD ####A” is displayed.
a) Requirement: Total Rectifier Module load current is displayed.
9) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
a) Requirement: Load current of the first Rectifier Module is displayed ("PCU**
LOAD ####A").
10) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton to display individual load currents of the remaining Rectifier Modules.
a) Requirement: As the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton is
pressed and released, load currents of the remaining Rectifier Modules are
displayed. When all Rectifier Modules are cycled through, "MEASUREMENT
MENU" is displayed.
11) If "MEASUREMENT MENU" is not displayed, repeatedly press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until it is.
12) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
13) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until
“SUBSYS ##.##VDC” (if subsystem installed) is displayed.
a) Requirement: Subsystem output voltage is displayed.
14) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
“SUB LOAD ####A” (if subsystem installed).
a) Requirement: Total subsystem load current is displayed.
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
a) Requirement: Load current through the first subsystem load shunt is
displayed ("SUB LOAD** ####A") (if subsystem installed).
16) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton to display individual load currents through the remaining subsystem
load shunts (if subsystem installed).
a) Requirement: As the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton is
pressed and released, currents through the remaining subsystem load
shunts are displayed. When all subsystem shunts are cycled through,
"MEASUREMENT MENU" is displayed.
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-29
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Checking Adjustment and Calibration Values
Procedure
1) Refer to Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments in the separate User Instructions
(Section 5975), and perform the adjustment and calibration procedures detailed
to check the value of all customer adjustable system circuits and the calibration
settings.
Note: If the MCA Initialization procedure was performed, all adjustments were
checked at that time.
Note: You may skip the adjustment procedures for the alarms and low voltage
disconnect circuits. They will be checked and adjusted later in this
procedure.
Note: If TXM (multiple probe concentrator module) is installed, set the
'temperature compensation source' per "Chapter 4. MCA System
Adjustments".
2) When done, come back and finish this procedure.
Checking MCA Audible Alarm and Audible Alarm Cutoff (if available)
Note: Applies only if power system is equipped with either a List 10 or List 11 MCA.
Procedure
1) Open the external AC disconnect or protective device that supplies power to a
Rectifier Module.
a) Requirement: Local or External MCA audible alarm sounds (if available).
b) Requirement: Other alarms activate. Disregard them here. They will be
confirmed in a later check.
2) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF pushbutton.
a) Requirement: Local or External MCA audible alarm silences (if available).
b) Requirement: MCA "ALARM CUTOFF" indicator goes yellow.
3) Wait the pre-programmed MCA audible alarm cutoff reset time interval.
a) Requirement: Local or External MCA audible alarm again sounds (if
available).
b) Requirement: MCA "ALARM CUTOFF" indicator goes out.
4) Return the external AC disconnect or protective device to the ON position.
a) Requirement: Local or External MCA audible alarm silences (if available).
Page 5-30
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Checking Manual Test/Equalize
and Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "TEST/EQ HRS = ##" or "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is displayed. If
"TEST/EQ HRS = ##" is displayed, perform steps 5) through 9). If "TEST/EQ
MAN STOP" is displayed, go to step 10).
5) Record the value indicated on the display.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ HRS =" portion of the display
flashes.
7) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed
increases above 99, then release the pushbutton.
a) Requirement: "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is displayed.
8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
9) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
11) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
12) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"SET TEST/EQ MODE".
13) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
14) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: System output voltage goes to the test/equalize setting.
b) Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes yellow.
c) Requirement: External test/equalize alarms activate (if available).
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-31
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
16) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"SET FLOAT MODE".
18) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
19) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: System output voltage goes to the float setting.
b) Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes out.
c) Requirement: External test/equalize alarms reset (if available).
Note:
The following portion of this procedure takes one hour to complete. If you do
not want to continue with this procedure, go to step 32).
20) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
21) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
22) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is displayed.
23) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
a) Requirement: The display changes to "TEST/EQ HRS = ##", and the
"TEST/EQ HRS =" portion of the display flashes.
24) Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is
decreased to 1, then release the pushbutton.
25) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
26) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
27) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
28) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
29) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"SET TEST/EQ MODE".
Page 5-32
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
30) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
31) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: System output voltage goes to the test/equalize setting.
b) Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes yellow.
c) Requirement: External test/equalize alarms activate (if available).
d) Requirement: In one hour, the following occurs...
1) Requirement: System output voltage goes to the float setting.
2) Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes out.
3) Requirement: External test/equalize alarms reset (if available).
32) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
33) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
34) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
35) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
36) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "TEST/EQ HRS = ##" is displayed.
37) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ HRS =" portion of the display
flashes.
38) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed
increases to the value recorded in step 5), then release the pushbutton. If
"TEST/EQ MAN STOP" was being displayed in step 5), press the FUNCTION
SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed increases above 99.
39) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
40) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
41) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-33
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Checking Remote Test/Equalize
Procedure
1) Apply a remote test/equalize signal to the system.
a) Requirement: System output voltage goes to the test/equalize setting.
b) Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes yellow.
c) Requirement: External test/equalize alarms activate (if available).
2) Remove the remote test/equalize signal from the system.
a) Requirement: System output voltage goes to the float setting.
b) Requirement: MCA "TEST/EQ" indicator goes out.
c) Requirement: External test/equalize alarms reset (if available).
Checking Remote High Voltage Shutdown
Caution: This procedure may interrupt power to the load. Perform this test only
during initial startup and checkout of the system.
Note: This procedures requires a load to be on the system.
Procedure
1) Apply and remove a remote high voltage shutdown signal to the system.
a) Requirement: The high voltage shutdown circuit on all Rectifier Modules
activates to shutdown the Rectifier Modules. After approximately four
seconds, the restart circuit is automatically activated to restore Rectifier
Module operation.
b) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red while the Rectifier
Modules are shut down, if battery is connected to the system.
c) Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active" while the Rectifier Modules
are shut down, if battery is connected to the system. Additional alarm
messages (Rectifier Module fail) are displayed as you scroll through the MCA
alarm menu.
d) Requirement: External major, rectifier fail, and MCA audible alarms activate
(if available) while the Rectifier Modules are shut down.
Checking Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect
Caution: This procedure may interrupt power to the load. Perform this test only
during initial startup and checkout of the system, or when a load is not
connected to the system.
Page 5-34
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Procedure
1) Apply an emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect signal to the system.
a) Requirement: The Rectifier Modules inhibit.
b) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red, if battery is connected
to the system.
c) Requirement: MCA displays "2 Alarms Active", if battery is connected to the
system. Additional alarm messages (Rectifier Module fail and emergency
stop) are displayed as you scroll through the MCA alarm menu.
d) Requirement: External major, rectifier fail, and MCA audible alarms activate
(if available).
2) Remove the emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect signal from the
system. Remove and re-insert the Rectifier Modules.
a) Requirement: The Rectifier Modules are restored.
b) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
c) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
d) Requirement: External major, rectifier fail, and MCA audible alarms reset (if
available).
Checking Remote On/Off (TR) (if RS-485 Interface is installed)
Procedure
1) Apply an external Remote On/Off (TR) signal to the system, via the LMS1000 (if
the RS-485 Interface is installed).
a) Requirement: Rectifier Module operation is inhibited for the Rectifier
Module that the signal is directed towards. This can be confirmed by placing
a load on the system and observing zero output current from this Rectifier
Module.
2) Remove the Remote On/Off (TR) signal from the system.
a) Requirement: Rectifier Module returns to normal operation. Rectifier
Module picks up share of the load.
Checking AC Fail Alarm and Rectifier Module Fail Alarm
Procedure
1) Open the external AC disconnect or protective device that supplies power to one
(or more) of the Rectifier Modules.
a) Requirement: Rectifier Module “Protection” indicator goes yellow.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-35
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
b) Requirement: MCA “AC” indicator goes red.
c) Requirement: MCA “MINOR” indicator goes red (power removed from one
Rectifier Module), or MCA "MAJOR" indicator flashes red (power removed
from more than one Rectifier Module).
Note: If there is only one Rectifier Module installed, the "MAJOR" indicator
flashes red.
d) Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages
(AC fail) are displayed as you scroll through the MCA alarm menu.
e) Requirement: External AC fail, minor or major, rectifier fail, and MCA
audible alarms activate (if available).
2) Open the external AC disconnect or protective device that supplies power to a
second Rectifier Module (individual Rectifier Module feeds only).
a) Requirement: Rectifier Module “Protection” indicator goes yellow.
b) Requirement: MCA “MINOR” indicator goes out.
c) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
d) Requirement: MCA still displays "1 Alarm Active", but additional Rectifier
Module fail alarm messages are displayed as you scroll through the MCA
alarm menu.
e) Requirement: External major, AC fail major, and rectifier fail alarms activate
(if available).
3) Return both external AC disconnects or protective devices to the ON position.
a) Requirement: Rectifier Module “Protection” indicator on both Rectifier
Modules go out.
b) Requirement: MCA “AC” indicator goes green.
c) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
d) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
e) Requirement: External AC fail, AC fail major, minor, major, rectifier fail, and
MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
Checking Fuse Alarm/Circuit Breaker Alarm
Procedure
1) Ensure that all circuit breakers (if installed) are in the ON position.
2) Remove an alarm-type fuse from a fuseholder located inside a Distribution
Cabinet, and replace with a known open fuse.
Page 5-36
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
b) Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages
(fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm) are displayed as you scroll through the
MCA alarm menu.
c) Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA
audible alarms activate (if available).
3) Replace the open fuse with a known good fuse.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
c) Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA
audible alarms reset (if available).
4) Perform steps 2) and 3) for each remaining alarm-type fuse located inside the
Distribution Cabinet.
5) Perform steps 2) through 4) for any additional Distribution Cabinet.
6) Remove a distribution fuse (if installed) from the fuseblocks located inside a
Distribution Cabinet, and replace with a known open fuse.
a) Requirement: The indicator located on the fuseblock goes red.
b) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
c) Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages
(fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm) are displayed as you scroll through the
MCA alarm menu.
d) Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA
audible alarms activate (if available).
7) Replace the open fuse with a known good fuse.
a) Requirement: The indicator located on the fuseblock goes out.
b) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
c) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
d) Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA
audible alarms reset (if available).
8) Perform steps 6) and 7) for each remaining distribution fuse (if installed) located
inside the Distribution Cabinet.
9) Perform steps 6) through 8) for any additional Distribution Cabinet.
10) Remove an alarm-type fuse from a subsystem (if connected).
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-37
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
a) Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator flashes red.
b) Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages
(fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm) are displayed as you scroll through the
MCA alarm menu.
c) Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA
audible alarms activate (if available).
11) Replace the open fuse with a known good fuse.
a) Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
c) Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA
audible alarms reset (if available).
12) Perform steps 10) and 11) for each remaining alarm-type fuse located in the
subsystem.
Note: The following procedure is to be used only with circuit breakers that provide
an alarm indication when manually placed to the OFF (open) position.
Electrical trip alarm circuit breakers cannot be easily tested in the field.
13) Place a distribution circuit breaker located inside a Distribution Cabinet (if
installed) to the OFF position.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
b) Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages
(fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm) are displayed as you scroll through the
MCA alarm menu.
c) Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA
audible alarms activate (if available).
14) Place the circuit breaker back to the ON position.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
c) Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA
audible alarms reset (if available).
15) Perform steps 13) and 14) for each remaining distribution circuit breaker (if
installed) located inside the Distribution Cabinet Assembly.
16) Perform steps 13) through 15) for any additional Distribution Cabinet Assembly.
17) Place a distribution circuit breaker located on a subsystem (if installed) to the
OFF position.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
Page 5-38
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
b) Requirement: MCA displays "1 Alarm Active". Additional alarm messages
(fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm) are displayed as you scroll through the
MCA alarm menu.
c) Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA
audible alarms activate (if available).
18) Place the circuit breaker back to the ON position.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
c) Requirement: External fuse alarm/circuit breaker alarm, major, and MCA
audible alarms reset (if available).
19) Perform steps 17) and 18) for each remaining distribution circuit breaker located
on the subsystem.
Checking System High Voltage Alarm 1
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS".
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6) "SYS HV1 = ##.##V" is displayed.
7) Record the value indicated on the display.
8) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SYS HVS =" portion of the display flashes.
9) Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is
decreased to below system voltage level, then release the pushbutton.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-39
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
b) Requirement: MCA displays a high voltage alarm 1 alarm message. To
view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-)
pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton.
c) Requirement: External high voltage alarm 1, major, and MCA audible
alarms activate (if available).
12) If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "FUNCTION MENU". Press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU"
is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. "SYS HV1 = ##.##V" is displayed.
13) With "SYS HV1 = ##.##V" being displayed, press and release the ALARM
CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
14) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is
increased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the required value for your site,
then release the pushbutton.
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: External high voltage alarm 1, major, and MCA audible
alarms reset (if available).
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Checking System High Voltage Alarm 2
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS".
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Page 5-40
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
6) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"SYS HV2 = ##.##V".
7) Record the value indicated on the display.
8) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SYS HV2 =" portion of the display flashes.
9) Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is
decreased to below system voltage level, then release the pushbutton.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
b) Requirement: MCA displays a high voltage alarm 2 alarm message. To
view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-)
pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton.
c) Requirement: External high voltage alarm 2, major, and MCA audible
alarms activate (if available).
12) If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "FUNCTION MENU". Press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU"
is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton to display "SYS HV2 = ##.##V".
13) With "SYS HV2 = ##.##V" being display, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF
and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
14) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is
increased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the required value for your site,
then release the pushbutton.
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: External high voltage alarm 2, major, and MCA audible
alarms reset (if available).
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-41
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Checking System Battery On Discharge Alarm
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS".
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "SYS BOD = ##.##V" is displayed.
7) Record the value indicated on the display.
8) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SYS BOD =" portion of the display flashes.
9) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is
increased to above system voltage level, then release the pushbutton.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
b) Requirement: MCA displays a battery on discharge alarm message. To
view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-)
pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton.
c) Requirement: External battery on discharge, major, and MCA audible
alarms activate (if available).
12) If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "FUNCTION MENU". Press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU"
is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN
arrow pushbutton until "SYS BOD = ##.##V" is displayed.
Page 5-42
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
13) With "SYS BOD = ##.##V" being displayed, press and release the ALARM
CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
14) Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is
decreased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the required value for your site,
then release the pushbutton.
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: External battery on discharge, major, and MCA audible
alarms reset (if available).
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Checking System 50% Battery On Discharge (Very Low Voltage) Alarm
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS".
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "SYS 50% = ##.##V (VERYLOVOLT = ##.##V)" is displayed.
7) Record the value indicated on the display.
8) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SYS 50% = (VERYLOVOLT =)" portion of the
display flashes.
9) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is
increased to above system voltage level, then release the pushbutton.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-43
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
11) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator flashes red.
b) Requirement: MCA displays a 50% battery on discharge (very low voltage)
alarm message. To view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the
FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
c) Requirement: External 50% battery on discharge (very low voltage), major,
and MCA audible alarms activate (if available).
12) If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "FUNCTION MENU". Press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU"
is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN
arrow pushbutton until "SYS 50% = ##.##V (VERYLOVOLT = ##.##V)" is
displayed.
13) With "SYS 50% = ##.##V (VERYLOVOLT = ##.##V)" being displayed, press and
release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously.
14) Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is
decreased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the required value for your site,
then release the pushbutton.
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA “MAJOR” indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: External 50% battery on discharge (very low voltage), major,
and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Checking System Current Alarm
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Page 5-44
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS".
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "SYS CURR = ####A" is displayed.
7) Record the value indicated on the display.
8) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SYS CURR =" portion of the display flashes.
9) Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is
decreased to below system output current level, then release the pushbutton.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA "MINOR" indicator goes red.
b) Requirement: MCA displays a system current alarm message. To view,
press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton.
c) Requirement: External, system current, minor, and MCA audible alarms
activate (if available).
12) If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "FUNCTION MENU". Press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU"
is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN
arrow pushbutton until "SYS CURR = ####A" is displayed.
13) With "SYS CURR = ####A" being displayed, press and release the ALARM
CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
14) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is
increased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the required value for your site,
then release the pushbutton.
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-45
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
16) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA "MINOR" indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: External system current, minor, and MCA audible alarms
reset (if available).
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Checking Subsystem (if connected) High Voltage Alarm
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS".
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "SUB HV = ##.##V" is displayed.
7) Record the value indicated on the display.
8) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SUB HV =" portion of the display flashes.
9) Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is
decreased to below system voltage level, then release the pushbutton.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator flashes red.
b) Requirement: MCA displays a subsystem high voltage alarm message. To
view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-)
pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton.
Page 5-46
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
c) Requirement: External major and MCA audible alarms activate (if
available).
12) If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "FUNCTION MENU". Press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU"
is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN
arrow pushbutton until "SUB HV = ##.##V" is displayed.
13) With "SUB HV = ##.##V" being displayed, press and release the ALARM
CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
14) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is
increased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the required value for your site,
then release the pushbutton.
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: External major and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Checking Subsystem (if connected) Low Voltage Alarm
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS".
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "SUB LV = ##.##V" is displayed.
7) Record the value indicated on the display.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-47
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
8) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SUB LV =" portion of the display flashes.
9) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is
increased to above system voltage level, then release the pushbutton.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator flashes red.
b) Requirement: MCA displays a subsystem low voltage alarm message. To
view, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-)
pushbuttons simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton.
c) Requirement: External major and MCA audible alarms activate (if
available).
12) If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "FUNCTION MENU". Press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU"
is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN
arrow pushbutton until "SUB LV = ##.##V" is displayed.
13) With "SUB LV = ##.##V" being displayed, press and release the ALARM
CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
14) Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is
decreased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the required value for your site,
then release the pushbutton.
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA "MAJOR" indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: External major and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Page 5-48
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Checking Subsystem (if connected) Current Alarm
Procedure
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS".
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "SUB CURR = ####A" is displayed.
7) Record the value indicated on the display.
8) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "SUB CURR =" portion of the display flashes.
9) Press the FUNCTION SET NO (-) pushbutton until the value displayed is
decreased to subsystem output current level, then release the pushbutton.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
11) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA "MINOR" indicator goes red.
b) Requirement: MCA displays a subsystem current alarm message. To view,
press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton.
c) Requirement: External minor and MCA audible alarms activate (if
available).
12) If the alarm message was viewed in b) above, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "FUNCTION MENU". Press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU"
is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST ALARMS". Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton. Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN
arrow pushbutton until "SYS CURR = ####A" is displayed.
13) With "SUB CURR = ####A" being displayed, press and release the ALARM
CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-49
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
14) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed is
increased to the value recorded in step 7) or to the required value for your site,
then release the pushbutton.
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: MCA "MINOR" indicator goes out.
b) Requirement: External minor and MCA audible alarms reset (if available).
17) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Checking Low Voltage Disconnect (if furnished)
The MCA is designed to prevent loss of power to customer loads caused by inadvertent
misadjustment. Because of this feature, the LVD circuits cannot be easily tested in the
field, and such testing is not recommended. The following procedure is provided for
users who do require acceptance testing of the LVD circuits.
Caution: This procedure requires disconnecting battery from the power system.
In addition, system output voltage will be reduced to 46 volts, and power
to the loads may be interrupted completely during this procedure.
Therefore, perform this test only during initial startup and checkout of
the system, or when critical loads are not connected.
Disconnecting Batteries
Danger: In the next step, batteries are an energy source that can produce high
amounts of electrical current. NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool,
to contact more than one energized termination at a time, or to
simultaneously contact an energized termination and a grounded object.
Even a momentary short circuit can cause an explosion resulting in
injury. Remove watches, ring and other jewelry, and wear eye protection
when working with battery connections. Terminations of live battery
cables must be sleeved when not connected.
1) Disconnect battery from the power system. To do so, open the external battery
disconnect device(s) if available, or disconnect battery cables as required.
Inhibiting LVD
1) If the system is equipped with a low voltage disconnect "normal/inhibit" switch,
place this switch to the "inhibit" position. This prevents accidental disconnection
of battery and system output from the controlled load(s) while performing this
procedure.
a) Requirement: The low voltage disconnect "inhibit" indicator illuminates.
Page 5-50
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Recording and Raising LVD Disconnect Setpoint(s)
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"ADJUST LVD".
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6) "LVD1A = ##.##V" is displayed (if installed). If you are checking the other low
voltage disconnect circuits, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until the respective low voltage disconnect
circuit name is displayed (LVD1B, LVD2A, LVD2B, LVD3A, or LVD3B).
Note:
For LVD 1, 2, and 3 circuits, the A and B sides must both agree for an
actual LVD to take place.
7) Record the value indicated on the display. This is the low voltage disconnect
setting for this circuit.
8) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. Portion of the display flashes.
9) Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton. Release the pushbutton when 46.00 volts is displayed.
10) With the 46.00 volts being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton.
11) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
Note: The low voltage disconnect value will not be changed and the adjustment
mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton is not pressed
within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE? + -” prompt.
12) Repeat steps 6 through 11 for each of the remaining LVD circuits (LVD1B,
LVD2A, LVD2B, LVD3A, or LVD3B) in the system.
13) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Configuring for Manual Test/Equalize
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
or
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-51
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
With "## ALARMS ACTIVE" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press
and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "FUNCTION
MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "CONFIGURE MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "TEST/EQ HRS = ##" or "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is displayed.
Note: If "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is displayed, the system is already set for
manual test/equalize. In this case, proceed with step 9).
Note: If "END TEQ ##.##HRS" is displayed, the system is set for manually
initiated timed test/equalize, and a timed test/equalize is in progress. In
this case, you can proceed with steps 5) through 8) to cancel the timed
test/equalize in progress and change the current setting, or proceed with
step 9) to proceed with the timed test/equalize in progress and make no
changes.
5) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ HRS =" portion of the display
flashes.
6) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton until the value displayed
increases above 99, then release the pushbutton. "TEST/EQ MAN STOP" is
displayed.
7) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
8) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
9) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Placing the System into Test/Equalize Mode
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
or
With "## ALARMS ACTIVE" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press
and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. Repeatedly press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until "FUNCTION
MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton.
2) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"SET TEST/EQ MODE".
Page 5-52
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
4) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Testing LVD Disconnect and Reconnect Functions
1) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) "ADJUST SYSTEM" is displayed.
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"TEST/EQ = ##.##V".
7) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ =" portion of the display flashes.
8) Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET NO (-)
pushbutton. Release the pushbutton when 46.00 volts is displayed.
9) With 46.00 volts being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton.
10) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
Note: The test/equalize voltage will not be changed and the adjustment mode
will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton is not pressed
within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE? + -” prompt.
a) Requirement: After a 5-10 second delay, the MCA LVD alarm activates.
(Additional alarms may also activate.) To view the alarm message(s), press
and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, then press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbutton.
b) Requirement: External LVD alarm activates (if available).
11) If the alarm message was viewed in a) above, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display "FUNCTION MENU".
12) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-53
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
13) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
“ADJUSTMENT MENU”.
14) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton. “ADJUST
SYSTEM” is displayed.
15) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
16) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"TEST/EQ = ##.##V".
17) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. The "TEST/EQ =" portion of the display flashes.
18) Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+)
pushbutton. Release the pushbutton when TEST/EQ setpoint previously
recorded is displayed.
19) With TEST/EQ setpoint previously recorded being displayed, press and release
the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
20) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
a) Requirement: After 10-15 seconds, alarm messages clear.
b) Requirement: After 10-15 seconds, external LVD alarm resets (if available).
21) Perform the following steps if the low voltage disconnect circuit is set for manual
reconnect. If set for automatic reconnect, there is a 15-20 second delay before
the LVD circuits reconnect.
a) With "## ALARMS ACTIVE" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad,
press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
b) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to
display "ALARM LVD ACTIVE".
c) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
d) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until the low voltage disconnect circuit being checked is displayed
("RECONNECT LVD**", **=the designation of the low voltage disconnect
circuit).
e) To reconnect the low voltage disconnect circuit being displayed, press and
release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbuttons
simultaneously.
f)
"ARE YOU SURE? +-" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton. The low voltage disconnect circuit reconnects.
22) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 5-54
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
Readjusting LVD Disconnect Setpoint(s) to Factory Setting
1) With "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and
release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUSTMENT MENU" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
4) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow
pushbutton until "ADJUST LVD" is displayed.
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
6) "LVD1A = ##.##V" is displayed (if installed). If you are adjusting the other low
voltage disconnect circuits, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton until the respective low voltage disconnect
circuit name is displayed (LVD1B, LVD2A, LVD2B, LVD3A, or LVD3B).
7) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously. Portion of the display flashes.
8) Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET NO (-)
pushbutton. Release the pushbutton when the TEST/EQ setpoint previously
recorded is displayed.
9) With the desired low voltage disconnect value being displayed, press and release
the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
10) “ARE YOU SURE? + -” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton. The display stops flashing.
Note: The low voltage disconnect value will not be changed and the adjustment
mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton is not pressed
within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE? + -” prompt.
11) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
12) Repeat this procedure to set the disconnect value for the other low voltage
disconnect circuits installed.
Returning to Float Mode
1) To return to float mode, with "SYSTEM OK" being displayed on the MCA
Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
2) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow pushbutton to display
"SET FLOAT MODE".
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-55
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER
pushbuttons simultaneously.
4) "ARE YOU SURE? + -" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) pushbutton.
Caution: DO NOT perform the next step until you verify that there are NO low
voltage disconnect alarms active. If the next step is performed when
low voltage disconnect alarms are active, battery and system output
will disconnect from the controlled load(s).
5) If the system is equipped with a low voltage disconnect "normal/inhibit" switch,
place this switch to the "normal" position.
a) Requirement: The low voltage disconnect "inhibit" indicator (if furnished)
extinguishes.
6) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons
simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
7) Repeat this procedure for the other low voltage disconnect circuits installed.
Reconnecting Batteries
Danger: In the next step, batteries are an energy source that can produce high
amounts of electrical current. NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool,
to contact more than one energized termination at a time, or to
simultaneously contact an energized termination and a grounded object.
Even a momentary short circuit can cause an explosion resulting in
injury. Remove watches, ring and other jewelry, and wear eye protection
when working with battery connections. Terminations of live battery
cables must be sleeved when not connected.
1) Reconnect battery to the power system. To do so, close the external battery
disconnect device(s) if available, or reconnect battery cables as required.
Page 5-56
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Checking System Status
Procedure: Observe the status of the display and indicators located on the Rectifier
Modules, MCA Interface Pad, and Distribution Cabinet. If the system is operating
normally, the status of these are as follows.
MCA Interface Pad:
a) Requirement: MCA displays SYSTEM OK message.
b) Requirement: MINOR indicator off.
c) Requirement: MAJOR indicator off.
d) Requirement: AC indicator green.
e) Requirement: TEST/EQ indicator off.
f)
Requirement: ALARM CUTOFF indicator off.
Rectifier Module:
a) Requirement: POWER indicator green.
b) Requirement: PROTECTION indicator off.
c) Requirement: FAULT indicator off.
Distribution Cabinet:
a) Requirement: Low Voltage Disconnect INHIBIT indicator off.
Final Step
Close the front door on each Distribution Cabinet. The door can be shut without turning
the captive fasteners.
Chapter 5. Installing Rectifier Modules and Initially Starting the System
Page 5-57
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5974
Issue AP, March 5, 2012
Installation Instructions
Spec. No. 582126000 (Model 701NVBB)
REVISION RECORD
Issue
Change
Number
(ECO)
AA
AB
LLP205275
LLP207162
AC
LLP207690
AD
LLP207874
AE
LLP208864
AF
LLP209291
AG
LLP210447
AH
LLP211072
AJ
LLP211509
AK
LLP211926
AL
LLP212882
AM
LLP214943
AN
LLP215944
AP
LLP216089
Description of Change
New
Branding changed from Lorain to NETSURE™.
MCA Main Controller Circuit Card P/N 509537 now P/N 534868. MCA
Configuration P/N 516834 now P/N 534876. MCA Configuration P/N 516835 now
P/N 534877. MCA Configuration P/N 516836 now P/N 534878. MCA
Configuration P/N 516837 now P/N 534879.
List 45 and Rectifier Shelf AC input terminal blocks changed. Recommended
torque updated. Shipping bracket option added, installation instructions revised.
List RE added.
Expanded rear aisle space requirements in mounting instructions.
Added note to chapter 4 referencing Lorain Battery Disconnect Panel interface
connections.
Added List 46. Added 588705000 List 3. Added notes for NEBS (General
Requirements Chapter 2, Relay Rack Grounding Connection Chapter 4).
Removed references to “test HVS” feature.
Relay rack P/Ns updated. Accessory Battery Landing Kit added to battery
connection section. 588705000 List 11 (Shelf with AC Line Cords) added.
Procedure to set switches on Rectifier Shelf Interface circuit card added.
External Shunt Monitoring Kit added. Lug Adapter installation instructions added.
Lists AP, TA, TB, 62, 63, 64, JA, JB, JC, JD, LB, LC, KA added.
Optional System Load Shunt Test Point Kit added.
Optional front battery cover added. Optional circuit breaker guard added.
Static Warning Page revised.
Removing rectifier module User information from this document and referencing
the separate rectifier User document.
Correct torque value of AC input connections to 588705000 List 3 and 582126000
List 46 from 10-lbs to 18-lbs.
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
NetPerform™ Optimization Services
At Emerson Network Power, we understand the importance of reliable equipment – it’s critical to both
your business and your bottom line. That is why we offer a wide array of services to meet all of your
network infrastructure needs.
Technical Support
Email
DCpower.TAC@Emerson.com
OSP.TAC@Emerson.com
Phone
1.800.800.5260
Answers technical product and system
questions; determines status of warranties and
contractual agreements for repair.
Services - Design, Deployment & Optimization
Email
ES.Services@Emerson.com
Phone
1.800.800.1280, option 7
FreedomCare Secure.EmersonNetworkPower.com
Provides quotes and bid responses, order
placement and scheduling for design, and
deployment and optimization services.
Download service & maintenance reports
online.
Spare Parts
Email
DCpower.Spares@Emerson.com
OSP.Spares@Emerson.com
Phone
1.800.800.1280, option 5
Pricing and PO processing of spare parts,
including but not limited to breakers, cables,
fuses, rectifier fans, misc. breaker and fuse
panels, enclosure fans, doors & switches, etc.
DC Power Depot Repair
Email
DCpower.Repair@Emerson.com
Phone
1.800.800.1280, option 6
Creates and processes RMAs, determines
lead times and pricing, provides repair
shipping information and status.
DC Power Product Training
Email
Phone
DCpower.Training@Emerson.com Requests for quotes, order placement and
scheduling.
1.800.800.1280, option 8
For More Information
To learn more about service offerings from Emerson Network Power, please contact your sales
representative, call 1-800-800-1280 option 7, email ES.Services@Emerson.com or visit
www.EmersonNetworkPower.com/EnergySystems.
Emerson (NYSE: EMR), based in St. Louis, Missouri (USA), is a global leader in bringing technology and engineering
together to provide innovative solutions for customers in industrial, commercial, and consumer markets through its
network power, process management, industrial automation, climate technologies, and tools and storage businesses.
For more information, visit: Emerson.com.
Emerson Network Power, a business of Emerson (NYSE:EMR), is the global leader in enabling Business-Critical Continuity™
from grid to chip for telecommunication networks, data centers, health care and industrial facilities. Emerson Network
Power provides innovative solutions and expertise in areas including AC and DC power, precision cooling, embedded
computing and power, integrated racks and enclosures, power switching and controls, infrastructure management, and
connectivity. All solutions are supported globally by local Emerson Network Power service technicians. For more
information on Emerson Network Power’s full suite of solutions specifically supporting the communications network
infrastructure, including NetSpan™, NetReach™ and NetXtend™ outside plant enclosures and equipment, NetSure™ DC
power systems, and NetPerform™ Optimization, Design & Deployment services, visit:
EmersonNetworkPower.com/EnergySystems.
Learn more about Emerson Network Power products and services at: EmersonNetworkPower.com.
Emerson Network Power
Energy Systems, North America
4350 Weaver Parkway, Warrenville, IL 60555
Toll Free: 800-800-1280 (USA and Canada)
Telephone: 440-246-6999 Fax: 440-246-4876
Web: EmersonNetworkPower.com/EnergySystems
EnergyNet: Secure.EmersonNetworkPower.com
Emerson Network Power.
The global leader in enabling Business-Critical Continuity™ .
AC Power
Connectivity
DC Power
EmersonNetworkPower.com
Embedded Computing
Embedded Power
Outside Plant
Power Switching & Controls
Racks & Integrated Cabinets
Services
Infrastructure Management & Monitoring
Precision Cooling
Surge Protection